Home

commands - D-Link

Contents

1. DAS 3626 admin create mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to create an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Syntax create mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt Description This command is used to create an MLD multicast VLAN group profile The profile name used for mld snooping must be unique Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the MLD multicast VLAN group profile name max length is 32 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an MLD multicast VLAN group profile g1 DAS 3626 admini create mld_snooping multicast _vlan_group profile gl Command create mld_snooping multicast _vlan_group profile gl Success DAS 3626 admin config mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to configure an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch to add or delete multicast address for the profile Syntax config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcast v6_address_list gt Description This command configures an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch and can add or delete multicast addresses for the profile Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the MLD multicast VLAN group profile name max length is 32 add delete Add or delete MLD multicast address list to or from this multicast VLAN group p
2. 238 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini config stp mst_config_id revision_level 10 name Trinity Command config stp mst config id revision _level 10 name Trinity Success DAS 3626 admin 239 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 240 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp mst_ports Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to update the port configuration for a MSTP instance config stp mst_ports lt portlist gt instance_id lt value 0 15 gt internalCost auto lt value 1 200000000 gt priority lt value 0 240 gt This command will update the port configuration for a STP instance_id If a loop occurs the MSTP function will use the port priority to select an interface to put into the forwarding state Set a higher priority value for interfaces to be selected for forwarding first In instances where the priority value is identical the MSTP function will implement the lowest MAC address into the forwarding state and other interfaces will be blocked Remember that lower priority values mean higher priorities for forwarding packets lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured instance_id lt value 0 15 gt Enter a numerical value between 0 and 15 to identify the instance_id previously configured on the Switch An entry of 0 will denote the CIST Commo
3. 411 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt attach lt vdsl_portlist gt all profile name lt name gt Vdsl2Profile 8a 8b 8c 8d 12a 12b 17a 30a autoprofile autoprofile1 UPBO disable g 993 2 custom lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt DPBO disable enable DPBOValues DPBOESEL lt int 0 511 gt DPBOESCMA lt int 0 640 gt DPBOESCMB lt int 0 640 gt DPBOESCMC lt int 0 640 gt DPBOMUS lt int 0 255 gt DPBOFMIN lt int 0 2048 gt DPBOFMAX lt int 32 6956 gt DPBOEPSD numpsd lt int 0 32 gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_valu
4. Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 150 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable qing Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to enable Q in Q mode enable qinq This command enables Q in Q mode None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable Q in Q DAS 3626 admin enable qinq Command enable qinq Success DAS 3626 admin disable qinq Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to disable the Q in Q mode disable qinq This command is used to disable the Q in Q mode None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To disable Q in Q DAS 3626 admin disable qinq Command disable qinq Success DAS 3626 admin 151 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show qinq Purpose Used to show global Q in Q Syntax show qinq Description This command is used to show the global Q in Q status Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show global Q in Q status DAS 3626 admin sh qinq Command show qinq QinQ Status Enabled default 0x8100 1 18 Total Entries DAS 3626 admin create qinq Purpose Used to create Q in Q Syntax create qinq lt vlan_name 32 gt spvid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt tpid lt hex 0x0 0xffff gt Description This comman
5. Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 69 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create arpentry Purpose Used to make a static entry into the ARP table Syntax create arpentry lt ipaddr gt lt macaddr gt Description This command is used to enter an IP address and the corresponding MAC address into the Switch s ARP table Parameters lt ijpaddr gt The IP address of the end node or station lt macaddr gt The MAC address corresponding to the IP address above 70 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create arpentry Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command The Switch supports up to 255 static ARP entries 71 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To create a static arp entry for the IP address 10 48 74 121 and MAC address 00 50 BA 00 07 36 72 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin tcreate arpentry 10 48 74 121 00 50 BA 00 07 36 Command create arpentry 10 48 74 121 00 50 BA 00 07 36 Success DAS 3626 admin 73 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 74 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config arpentry Purpose Used to configure a static entry in the ARP table Syntax config arpentry lt ipaddr gt lt macaddr
6. Restrictions None Example usage To ping the IP address 10 48 74 121 four times DAS 3626 admin ping 10 48 74 121 times 4 Command ping 10 48 74 121 Reply from 10 48 74 121 time lt 10ms Reply from 10 48 74 121 time lt 10ms Reply from 10 48 74 121 time lt 10ms Reply from 10 48 74 121 time lt 10ms Ping statistics for 10 48 74 121 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 DAS 3626 admin 42 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage To ping the IPv6 DAS 3626 admin p Command ping 1 Reply from 1001 Reply from 1001 Reply from 1001 Reply from 1001 Ping Statistics Used to test the connectivity between network devices ping6 lt ipv6addr gt times lt value 1 255 gt size lt value 1 6000 gt timeout lt value 1 10 gt This command is used to send Internet Control Message Protocol ICMPv6 echo messages to a remote IP address The remote IPv6 address will then echo or return the message This is used to confirm connectivity between the Switch and the remote device lt ipv6addr gt Specifies the IPv6 address of the host times lt value 1 255 gt The number of individual ICMPv6 echo messages to be sent A value of 0 will send an infinite ICMP echo messages The maximum value is 255 The default is 0 size lt value 1 6000 gt Use this parameter to set the datagram size of the packet
7. 133 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3600 5 create vlan vlanid 5 advertisement Command create vlan vlanid 5 advertisement Success DAS 3600 5 134 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 135 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete vian Purpose Used to delete a previously configured VLAN on the Switch Syntax delete vlan lt vian_name 32 gt Description This command is used to delete a previously configured VLAN on the Switch Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The VLAN name of the VLAN to delete 136 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete vian Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 137 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To remove the VLAN v1 DAS 3626 admin delete vlan v1 Command delete vlan v1 Success DAS 3626 admin delete vian vianid Purpose Used to delete multiple VLANs by VLAN ID on the switch Syntax delete vian vianid lt vidlist gt Description This command is used to delete previously configured multiple VLANs on the switch Parameters lt vidlist gt Specifies a range of multiple VLAN IDs to be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete VLAN ID on the switch DAS 3626 admi
8. Name of the profile if not specified all profiles will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display a multicast filter profile DAS 3626 admin show mcast_filter profile ipv4 Command show mcast_filter profile ipv4 Profile ID Multicast Addresses 1 234 1 1 1 238 244 244 244 Total Profile Count DAS 3626 admin 57 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config limited_multicast_addr ports Purpose Used to configure the multicast address filtering function on a port Syntax config limited_multicast_addr ports lt portlist gt vianid lt vlanid_list gt ipv4 ipv6 add delete profile_id lt value 1 60 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt access permit deny Description This command is used to configure the multicast address filtering function on a port When there are no profiles specified with a port the limited function is not effective When the function is configured on a port it limits the multicast group operated by the IGMP Parameters lt portlist gt A range of ports to config the multicast address filtering function lt vianid_list gt A range of VLAN IDs to config the multicast address filtering function add Add a multicast address profile to a port delete Delete a multicast address profile to a port profile_id A profile to be added to or deleted from the port profile_name lt name 1 32 gt The name of the profi
9. Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given enable method list to delete 368 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete authen_enable method_list_name Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 369 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To delete the user defined method list Permit 370 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin delete authen_enable method_list_name Permit Command delete authen_enable method_list_name Permit Success DAS 3626 admin 371 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show authen_enable Purpose Used to display the method list of authentication methods for promoting normal user level privileges to Administrator level privileges on the Switch Syntax show authen_enable default method_list_name lt string 15 gt all Description This command is used to delete a user defined method list of authentication methods for promoting user level privileges to Administrator level privileges Parameters default Entering this parameter will display the default method list for users attempting to gain access to Administrator level privileges on the Switch method_list_name lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define
10. The option 82 field will be retained if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure DHCP relay option 82 policy DAS 3626 admin config dhcp relay option_82 policy replace Command config dhcp relay option_82 policy replace Success DAS 3626 admin 81 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show dhcp_relay Purpose Used to display the current DHCP BOOTP relay configuration Syntax show dhcp_ relay ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt Description This command will display the current DHCP relay configuration for the Switch or if an IP interface name is specified the DHCP relay configuration for that IP interface Parameters ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt The name of the IP interface for which to display the current DHCP relay configuration Restrictions None Example usage To show the DHCP relay configuration DAS 3626 admini show dhcp relay Command show dhcp relay DHCP Bootp Relay Status Disabled Hops Count Limit 22 Relay Time Threshold 23 Agent Information Option 82 State Disabled Agent Information Option 82 Check Disabled Agent Information Option 82 Policy Replace Interface Server 1 Server Server 3 Server 4 DAS 3626 admin Example usage To show a single IP destination of the DHCP relay configuration DAS 3626 admini
11. To display the parameters for a specific command DAS 3626 admin config stp Command config stp Command config stp Usage maxage lt value 6 40 gt maxhops lt value 1 20 gt hellotime lt value 1 2 gt forwarddelay lt value 4 30 gt txholdcount lt value 1 10 gt fbpdu enable disable nni_bpdu_addr dotld dotlad Description Used to update the STP Global Configuration config stp instance_id config stp mst_config id config stp mst_ports config stp ports config stp priority config stp version DAS 3626 admin config command_history Purpose Used to configure the command history Syntax config command_history lt value 1 40 gt Description This command is used to configure number of the executed command to be recorded in CLI Parameters lt value 1 40 gt The number of previously executed commands maintained in the buffer Up to 40 of the latest executed commands may be viewed Restrictions None Example usage To configure the command history DAS 3626 admini config command history 20 Command config command_history 20 Success DAS 3626 admin 472 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show command_history Purpose Used to display the command history Syntax show command_history Description This command is used to display currently used command history Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the co
12. DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default reset Command config vdsl profile name default reset Success DAS 3626 admin 438 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete vdsl profile Purpose Used to delete vdsl profile Syntax delete vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt Description This command is used to delete vdsl profile Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be delete name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be delete Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete vdsl profile DAS 3626 admin delete vdsl profile name vdsl_line1 Command delete vdsl profile name vdsl_line1 Success DAS 3626 admin show vdsl profile Purpose Used to show vdsl profile Syntax show vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt all temp run Description This command is used to show vdsl profile Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be show name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be show temp run temporary profile settings use attatch command to apply or currently running profile settings Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To reset vdsl profile to show DAS 3626 admin shwo vdsl profile name default Command delete vdsl profile name
13. None To view the current IGMP snooping forwarding information DAS 3626 admini show igmp snooping forwarding Command show igmp snooping forwarding VLAN Name Source IP Multicast Group Port Member Total Entries default 225 1 1 1 3 show igmp_snooping static_group Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to display the current IGMP snooping static group information on the Switch show igmp_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipaddr gt This command is used to display the current IGMP snooping static group information on the Switch lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view IGMP snooping static group information if not specified all static groups will be displayed lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to view IGMP snooping static group information if not specified all static groups will be displayed lt ipaddr gt The static group address for which to view IGMP snooping static group information None 170 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To view the current IGMP snooping static group information DAS 3626 admini show igmp snooping static_group Command show igmp snooping static_group VLAN ID Name 1 default Total Entries DAS 3626 admin IP Address Static Member Ports 225 1 1 1 create ig
14. RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie Hellman key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash Algorithm RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 40 bit keys 299 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual disable ssl Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the SSL status on the Switch DAS 3626 admin disable ssl Command disable ssl Success DAS 3626 admin To disable ciphersuite RSA_EXPORT with RC4 40 MDS only DAS 3626 admini disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4 40 MD5 Command disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4 40 MD5 Success DAS 3626 admin config ssl cachetimeout Purpose Used to configure the SSL cache timeout Syntax config ssl cachetimeout timeout lt value 60 86400 gt Description This command will set the time between a new key exchange between a client and a host using the SSL function A new SSL session is established every time the client and host go through a key exchange Specifying a longer timeout will allow the SSL session to reuse the master key on future connections with that particular host therefore speeding up the neg
15. The DAS 3600 Series supports a console management interface that allows the user to connect to the Switch s management agent via a serial port and a terminal or a computer running a terminal emulation program The console can also be used over the network using the TCP IP Telnet protocol The console program can be used to configure the Switch to use an SNMP based network management software over the network This chapter describes how to use the console interface to access the Switch change its settings and monitor its operation si Note Switch configuration settings are saved to non volatile RAM using the save command The id current configuration will then be retained in the Switch s NV RAM and reloaded when the Switch is rebooted If the Switch is rebooted without using the save command the last configuration saved to NV il RAM will be loaded Connecting to the Switch The console interface is used by connecting the Switch to a VT100 compatible terminal or a computer running an ordinary terminal emulator program e g the HyperTerminal program included with the Windows operating system using an RS 232C serial cable Your terminal parameters will need to be set to e VT 100 compatible e 115200 baud e 8 data bits e No parity e One stop bit e No flow control Users can also access the same functions over a Telnet interface Once users have set an IP address for your Switch users can use a Telnet program in VT 100 compat
16. dscp lt value 0 63 gt icmp type lt value 0 255 gt code lt value 0 255 gt igmp type lt value 0 255 gt tcp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt urg ack psh rst syn fin Judp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt user_define lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 packet_content destination_mac lt macaddr gt mask lt macmask gt source_mac lt macaddr gt mask lt macmask gt outer_tag lt hex 0x0 0x0fff gt mask lt hex 0x0 0xOfff gt offset1 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset2 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset3 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt mask lt hex 0x0 0xff gt offset4 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset5 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset6 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt 1 ipv6 class lt value 0 255 gt flowlabel lt hex 0x0 0Oxfffff gt source_ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt mask lt ipv6mask gt destination_ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt mask lt ipv6mask gt tcp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt udp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port lt v
17. local4 Specifies that local use 4 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 20 from the list above local5 Specifies that local use 5 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 21 from the list above local6 Specifies that local use 6 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 22 from the list above local7 Specifies that local use 7 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 23 from the list above udp_port lt udp_port_number gt Specifies the UDP port number that the syslog protocol will use to send messages to the remote host state enable disable Allows the sending of syslog messages to the remote host specified above to be enabled and disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 460 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure a Syslog host DAS 3626 admin tconfig syslog host 1 severity all Command config syslog host 1 severity all Success DAS 3626 admin Example usage To configure a syslog host for all hosts DAS 3626 admin config syslog host all severity all Command config syslog host all severity all Success DAS 3626 admin delete syslog host Purpose Used to remove a syslog host that has been previously configured from the Switch Syntax delete syslog host lt
18. lt psd_level 60 140 gt lt psd_level 60 140 gt lt psd_level 60 140 gt state disable enable disable enable disable enable disable enable disable enable disable enable disable enable Description This command is used to config vdsl profile virtual noise Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed VirtualNoise To config VDSL profile virtual noise level support 7 level USO US1 DS1 US2 DS2 US3 DS3 to set virtulal noise lt psd_level 60 140 gt The range is 60 140 in unit of dBm Hz state enable disable virtual noise on 7 level disable enable enable disable virtual noise on specific level Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile vdsl profile virtual noise DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default VirtualNoise level 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 state enable disable disable disable disable disable disable Command config vdsl profile name default VirtualNoise level 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 state enable disable disable disable disable disable disable Success DAS 3626 admin 436 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile SRADn SRAUp Purpose Used to config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream SRA Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt SRADn SRA
19. udp_port lt udp_port_number gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt state enable disable Description This command is used to configure the syslog protocol to send system log information to a remote host Parameters lt index 1 4 gt Specifies that the command will be applied to an index of hosts There are four available indexes numbered 1 through 4 ipaddress lt ipaddr gt Specifies the IP address of the remote host where syslog messages will be sent severity Severity level indicator These are described in the following Bold font indicates that the corresponding severity level is currently supported on the Switch Numerical Severity Code 0 Emergency system is unusable 1 Alert action must be taken immediately 2 Critical critical conditions 3 Error error conditions 4 Warning warning conditions 5 Notice normal but significant condition 6 Informational informational messages 7 Debug debug level messages informational Specifies that informational messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 6 from the list above warning Specifies that warning messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 4 from the list above all Specifies that all of the currently supported syslog messages that are generated by the Switch will be sent to the remote host facility Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values Proce
20. An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that identifies the SNMP view that will be displayed None To display SNMP view configuration DAS 3626 admin show snmp view Command show snmp view Vacm View Table Settings View Name restricted restricted restricted restricted restricted CommunityView CommunityView CommunityView Total Entries DAS 3626 admin Included Included Included Included Included Included Excluded Included PPP P PP Pp Pp 91 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create snmp community Purpose Used to create an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and an agent The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switch One or more of the following characteristics can be associated with the community string An Access List of IP addresses of SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community string to gain access to the Switch s SNMP agent An MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects that will be accessible to the SNMP community read_write or read_only level permission for the MIB objects accessible to the SNMP community Syntax create snmp community lt community_string 32 gt view lt view_name 32 gt read_only read_write Description This command is used to create an SNMP community string and to assign access limiting characteristics to this community
21. Example usage Used to display information regarding Neighbor Detection on the switch show ipv6 nd ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt This command is used to show information regarding the IPv6 Neighbor Detection function of the switch Users may specify an IP interface for which to view this information lt ipif_ name 12 gt Enter the IP interface of the IPv6 interface for which to view this information Omitting this parameter will display all information regarding neighbor detection currently set on the switch Only Administrator level users can issue this command To display the neighbor detection parameters for IPv6 DAS 3626 admin show ipv6 nd Command show ipv nd Interface Name DAS 3626 admin System NS Retransmit Time 1000000 ms 53 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Limiteo IP Mutticast ADDRESS The Limited IP Multicast command allows the administrator to permit or deny access to a port or range of ports by specifying a range of multicast addresses The Limited IP Multicast Commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create mcast_filter_profile ipv4 ipv6 profile_id lt value 1 60 gt profile _name lt name 1 32 gt confia mcast Alter profile profile_id lt value 1 60 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt profile_name g p lt name 1 32 gt add delete
22. Purpose Used to globally disable STP on the Switch Syntax disable stp Description This command allows the Spanning Tree Protocol to be globally disabled on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable STP on the Switch DAS 3626 admin disable stp Command disable stp Success DAS 3626 admin 213 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp version Purpose Used to globally set the version of STP on the Switch Syntax config stp version mstp rstp stp Description This command allows the user to choose the version of the spanning tree to be implemented on the Switch Parameters mstp Selecting this parameter will set the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP globally on the Switch rstp Selecting this parameter will set the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP globally on the Switch stp Selecting this parameter will set the Spanning Tree Protocol STP globally on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the Switch globally for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP DAS 3626 admin config stp version mstp Command config stp version mstp Success DAS 3626 admin 214 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp Purpose Used to setup STP RSTP
23. Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed 451 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual clear counters Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 452 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To clear the counters 453 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin tclear counters ports 2 9 Command clear counters ports 2 9 Success DAS 3626 admin 454 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual clear log Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to clear the Switch s history log clear log This command is used to clear the Switch s history log None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To clear the log information DAS 3626 admin clear log Command clear log Success DAS 3626 admin show log Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the switch history log show log index lt value_list gt This command is used to display the contents of the Switch s history log index lt value_list gt This parameter specifies the range of log index to show For example show log index 1 5 will display the history log from 1 to 5 If no parameter is specified all history log entries will be
24. Success DAS 3626 admin show igmp_snooping Purpose Used to show the current status of IGMP snooping on the Switch Syntax show igmp_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid_list gt Description This command will display the current IGMP snooping configuration on the Switch Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view the IGMP snooping 164 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show igmp_snooping configuration lt vianid_list gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which to view the IGMP snooping configuration Restrictions None 165 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To show IGMP snooping DAS 3626 admin show igmp snooping Command show igmp snooping IGMP Snooping Global State Data Driven Learning Max Entries VLAN Name Query Interval Max Response Time Robustness Value Last Member Query Interval Querier State Querier Role Querier IP Querier Expiry Time State Fast Leave Report Suppression Rate Limit Version Data Driven Learning State Data Driven Learning Aged Out Data Driven Group Expiry Time Total Entries 1 DAS 3626 admin show router_ports Purpose Syntax forbidden Description Parameters Enabled 128 default 125 10 2 1 Disable Non Querier 0 0 0 0 0 secs Disable Disable Enable No Limitation
25. To configure the external alarm on channel 1 DAS 3626 admimtbnfig external_alarm channel 1 message Channel 1 alarm occurs Command config external_alarm channel 1 message Channel 1 alarm occurs Success DAS 3626 admin 85 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Network ManAcement SNMP Commanps The Switch supports the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 Users can specify which version of the SNMP users want to use to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device The following table lists the security features of the three SNMP versions SNMP Authentication Description Version Method Community String Community String is used for authentication NoAuthNoPriv Community String Community String is used for authentication NoAuthNoPriv v3 Username Username is used for authentication NoAuthNoPriv AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv MD5 or SHA Authentication is based on the HMAC MD5 or HMAC SHA algorithms AuthNoPriv MD5 DES or SHA Authentication is based on the HMAC MD5 or HMAC SHA algorithms DES AuthPriv DES 56 bit encryption is added based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard The network management commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create snmp
26. mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset6 lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt mask lt hex 0x0 O0xff gt With this advanced unique Packet Content Mask also known as Packet Content Access Control List ACL D Link switches can effectively mitigate some network attacks like the common ARP Spoofing attack that is wide spread today This is the reason that Packet Content ACL is able to inspect any specified content of a packet in different protocol layers IPV6 Denotes that IPv6 packets will be examined by the Switch for forwarding or filtering 404 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config access_profile Parameters port lt portlist gt Specifies the port number on the Switch to permit or deny access for the rule vianbased vlan lt vlan_name gt vian_id lt value 1 4094 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only to this VLAN permit Specifies the rule permit access for incoming packets on the previously specified port priority lt value 0 7 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to packets that contain this value in their 802 1p priority field of their header for incoming packets on the previously specified port replace_priority Allows users to specify a new value to be written to the priority field of an incoming packet on the previously specified port replace_dscp_with lt value 0 63 gt Allows users to specify a new value to be written to the DSCP field of an
27. or by a user defined group previously created using the create authen server_group command e tacacs Use this parameter to utilize the built in TACACS server protocol on the Switch Only server hosts utilizing the TACACS protocol may be added to this group xtacacs Use this parameter to utilize the built in XTACACS server protocol on the Switch Only server hosts utilizing the XTACACS protocol may be added to this group tacacs Use this parameter to utilize the built in TACACS server protocol on the Switch Only server hosts utilizing the TACACS protocol may be added to this group radius Use this parameter to utilize the built in RADIUS server protocol on the Switch Only server hosts utilizing the RADIUS protocol may be added to this group lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the previously created server group This group may add any combination of server hosts to it regardless of protocol add delete Enter the correct parameter to add or delete a server host from a server group server_host lt ipaddr gt Enter the IP address of the previously configured server host to add or delete protocol Enter the protocol utilized by the server host There are three options e tacacs Use this parameter to define the protocol if the server host is using the TACACS authentication protocol xtacacs Use this parameter to define the protocol if the server host is usi
28. 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 176 9 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 6 0 192 0 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 208 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 224 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 240 9 9 9 9 9 10 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 6 0 256 0 6 9 9 9 9 9 10 9 9 10 9 9 9 9 9 272 9 9 10 9 10 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 9 288 10 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 9 10 9 9 9 9 9 304 9 9 10 9 10 9 9 9 9 9 10 9 10 9 8 0 DAS 3626 admin 419 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage Show vdsl line status DAS 3626 admin show vdsl line 24 status show vdsl line 24 status Line24 vdsI24 Link State Showtime Line TYPE Interleaved Line Uptime 0 days 20 hours 25 minutes 24 seconds Band Plan ITU ANNEX A EU32 VDSL2 Profile 30a Downstream Upstream Line Rate 118 252Mbps 115 972Mbps Payload Rate 103 984Mbps 101 992Mbps Attainable Payload Rate 104 960Mbps 104 960Mbps SNR Margin USO N A N A DS1 US1 20 2dB 10 4db DS2 US2 20 5dB 11 0db DS3 US3 20 4dB 9 5db Average SNR Margin 20 3dB 9 5dB Interleave Delay 7 7ms 7 7ms INP in DMT symbols 1 4 1 4 Transmit power 12 4dBm 7 7dBm Line Attenuation USO N A N A DS1 US1 0 1dB 0 0db DS2 US2 0 1dB 1 7db CTRL C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All DAS 3626 admin 420 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet o
29. DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters config cfm md lt string 22 gt mip none auto explicit sender_id none chassis manage chassis_manage config cfm ma lt string 22 gt md lt string 22 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt mip none auto explicit defer sender_id none chassis manage chassis_manage defer ccm_interval 10ms 100ms 1sec 10sec 1min 10min mepid_list add delete lt mepid_list gt create cfm mep lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt direction inward outward port lt port gt config cfm mep mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt state enable disable ccm enable disable pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt fault_alarm all mac_status remote_ccm error_ccm xcon_ccm none alarm_time lt centiseconds 250 1000 gt alarm_reset_time lt centiseconds 250 1000 gt C C Sd OOSOSCSCSCSCSCSCSCSCSC SCSCSC d show cfm remote_mep mepname lt string 32 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt remote_mepid lt int 1 8191 gt aowe OOOO cfm loopback lt macaddr gt mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt num lt int 1 65535 gt length lt int 0 1500 gt pattern lt string 1500 gt pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt
30. Disabling MLD snooping allows all MLD and IPv6 multicast traffic to flood within a given IPv 6 interface Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable MLD snooping on the switch DAS 3626 admini disable mld_snooping Command disable mld_snooping Success DAS 3626 admin show mlid_snooping Purpose Used to the current status of MLD snooping on the switch Syntax show mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Description This command is used to display the current MLD snooping configuration on the switch Parameters vlan_name The name of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping configuration vlanid list The VIDs of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping configuration If no parameter specified the system will display all current MLD snooping configurations Restrictions None 195 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To show MLD snooping on the switch DAS 3626 admin show mld_snooping Command show mld_snooping MLD Snooping Global State Data Driven Learning Max Entries VLAN Name Query Interval Max Response Time Robustness Value Disabled 128 default 125 10 2 Last Listener Query Interval 1 State Disable Role Non Querier IP Expiry Time Querier Querier Querier 0 secs Disable Di
31. Each command is listed in detail in the following sections See Switch Utility Commands for descriptions of all autoconfig commands 44 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config ipif Purpose Used to configure the IP interface Syntax config ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt ipaddress lt network_address gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt state enable disable bootp dhcp ipv6 ipv6address lt ipv6networkaddr gt state enable disable ipv4 state enable disable Description This command is used to configure the IP interface on the Switch Parameters lt ipif_name 12 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 12 characters to identify this IP interface ipaddress lt network_address gt IP address and netmask of the IP interface to be created Users can specify the address and mask information using the traditional format for example 10 1 2 3 255 0 0 0 or in CIDR format 10 1 2 3 8 lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN corresponding to the System IP interface state enable disable Allows users to enable or disable the IP interface bootp Allows the selection of the BOOTP protocol for the assignment of an IP address to the Switch s System IP interface dhcp Allows the selection of the DHCP protocol for the assignment of an IP address to the Switch s System IP interface If users are using the autoconfig feature the Switch becomes a DHCP client automat
32. Example usage To configure the user defined method list Permit with authentication methods TACACS XTACACS and local in that order 363 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin config authen_enable method list name Trinity method tacacs xtacacs local Command config authen_enable method_list_name Trinity method tacacs xtacacs local Success DAS 3626 admin 364 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure the default method list with authentication methods XTACACS TACACS and local in that order 365 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini config authen_enable default method xtacacs tacacs local Command config authen_enable default method xtacacs tacacs local Success DAS 3626 admin 366 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 367 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete authen_enable method_list_name Purpose Used to delete a user defined method list of authentication methods for promoting normal user level privileges to Administrator level privileges on the Switch Syntax delete authen_enable method_list_name lt string 15 gt Description This command is used to delete a user defined method list of authentication methods for promoting user level privileges to Administrator level privileges
33. PSDBreakPointTx PSDBreakPointRx Purpose Used to config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream PSD breakpoint Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt PSDBreakPointTx PSDBreakPointRx numpsd lt int 0 32 gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt p
34. Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To initiate the login procedure DAS 3626 admin login Command login UserName Purpose Used to log out a user from the Switch s console Syntax logout Description This command terminates the current user s session on the Switch s console Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To terminate the current user s console session DAS 3626 admin logout 27 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Mopiry BANNER AND Prompt CommaANDs Administrator level users can modify the login banner greeting message and command prompt by using the commands described below Command Parameters config command_ prompt lt string 16 gt username default config greeting_message default The modify Banner and Prompt commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table config command prompt Purpose Used to configure the command prompt Syntax config command_prompt lt string 16 gt username default Description This command is for users to change the command prompt Parameters string 16 The command prompt can be changed by entering a new name of no more that 16 characters username The command prompt will be changed to the login username default The command prompt will reset to factory default command prompt Restrictions Only Ad
35. Purpose Syntax Description Used to configure a user defined method list of authentication methods for promoting normal user level privileges to Administrator level privileges on the Switch config authen_enable default method_list_name lt string 15 gt method tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius server_group lt string 15 gt local_enable none This command is used to promote users with normal level privileges to Administrator level privileges using authentication methods on the Switch Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the Switch he or she must be authenticated by a method on the Switch to gain administrator privileges on the Switch which is defined by the Administrator A maximum of eight enable method lists can be implemented simultaneously on the Switch The sequence of methods implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of methods like tacacs xtacacs local_enable the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no verification is found the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed xtacacs If no authentication takes place using the xtacacs list the local_enable password set in the Switch is used to authenticate
36. Telnet Trinity default SSH default default HTTP default default DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to create an authentication server host Syntax create authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius port lt int 1 65535 gt key lt key_string 254 gt none timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt 1 255 gt Description This command will create an authentication server host for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security protocols on the Switch When a user attempts to access the Switch with authentication protocol enabled the Switch will send authentication packets to a remote TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host on a remote host The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host will then verify or deny the request and return the appropriate message to the Switch More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16 Parameters server_host lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the remote server host to add protocol The protocol used by the server host The user may choose one of the following e tacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol e xtacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol e tacacs Enter this parameter if the server h
37. admin To configure the DHCP filter state DAS 3626 admini config filter dhcp server ports 1 10 state enable Command config filter dhcp server ports 1 10 state enable Success DAS 3626 admin show filter dhcp_server Purpose Used to display current DHCP server client filter list created on the switch Syntax show filter dhcp_server Description This command is used to display DHCP server client filter list created on the switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator users can issue this command 393 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the DHCP server filter list created on the switch DAS 3626 admin show filter dhcp server Command show filter dhcp server Enabled Ports 1 3 Filter DHCP Server Client Table Server IP Address Client MAC Address Total Entries DAS 3626 admin config filter netbios Purpose Used to configure the switch to filter NetBIOS packets from specified ports Syntax config filter netbios lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command will configure the switch to filter NetBIOS packets from the specified ports Parameters lt portlist gt all The list of port numbers to which the NetBIOS filter will be applied state enable disable Used to enable disable the NetBIOS filter on the switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Enabling the NetBI
38. admin show mlid_snooping static_group Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to display the current MLD snooping static group information on the Switch show mld_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipv6addr gt This command is used to display the current MLD snooping static group information on the Switch lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view MLD snooping static group information if not specified all static group will be displayed lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to view MLD snooping static group information if not specified all static group will be displayed lt ipv6addr gt The static group IPv6 address for which to view MLD snooping static group information None 199 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To view the current MLD snooping static group information DAS 3626 admin show mld_snooping static_group Command show mld_ snooping static_group VLAN ID Name IP Address Static Member Ports default default Total Entries 2 DAS 3626 admin create mld_snooping static_group Purpose Used to display the current MLD snooping static group information on the Switch Syntax create mld_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipv6addr gt Description This command is used to c
39. lt ipaddr gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only packets with this destination IP address dscp lt value 0 63 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this value in their Type of Service DiffServ code point DSCP field in their IP packet header icmp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field within each packet type lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to this ICMP type value code lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to this ICMP code igmp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field within each packet type lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to packets that have this IGMP type value tcp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Transmission Control Protocol TCP field within each packet e src_port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this TCP source port in their TCP header e dst port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this TCP destination port in their TCP header urg TCP control flag urgent ack TCP control flag acknowledgement psh TCP control flag push rst TCP control flag reset syn TCP control flag synchronize fin TCP contr
40. lt mcast_address_list gt prone lt value 1 60 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt profile_name name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcastv6_address_list gt config limited_multicast_addr ports ports lt portlist gt vianid lt vlanid_list gt ipv4 ipv6 add delete profile_id lt value 1 60 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt access permit deny show limited_multicast_addr ports ipv4 ipv6 ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt config max_mcast_group ports ipv4 ipv6 ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list max_group lt value 1 1024 gt infinite show max_mcast_group ports ipv4 ipv6 ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create mcast_filter_profile profile_id Purpose This command creates a multicast address profile Syntax create mcast_filter_profile ipv4 ipv6 profile_id lt value 1 60 gt lt name 1 32 gt Description This command configures a multicast address profile Mutliple ranges of multicast addresses can be defined in the profile Parameters profile_id ID of the profile The range is 7 to 60 lt name 1 32 gt Provides a meaningful description for the profile Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 54 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To create a multicast filter
41. server This file will be replaced by the uploaded file from the Switch Restrictions The TFTP server must be on the same IP subnet as the Switch Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 41 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To upload a configuration file DAS 3626 admin upload cfg toTFTP 10 48 74 121 c cfg configuration txt Command upload cfg toTFTP 10 48 74 121 c cfg configuration txt Connecting to server Upload configuration DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to test the connectivity between network devices Syntax ping lt ipaddr gt times lt value 1 255 gt timeout lt sec 1 99 gt size lt value 32 1500 gt Description This command is used to send Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo messages to a remote IP address The remote IP address will then echo or return the message This is used to confirm connectivity between the Switch and the remote device Parameters lt ipaddr gt Specifies the IP address of the host times lt value 1 255 gt The number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent A value of 0 will send an infinite ICMP echo messages The maximum value is 255 The default is 0 timeout lt sec 1 99 gt Defines the time out period while waiting for a response from the remote device A value of 1 to 99 seconds can be specified The default is 1 second size lt value 32 1500 gt Defines the packet size
42. while admit_all implies tagged and untagged frames will be accepted by the Switch pvid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Specifies the default VLAN associated with the port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the ingress checking status the sending and receiving GVRP information DAS 3626 admin config port vlan 1 4 gvrp_state enable ingress checking enable acceptable frame tagged_only pvid 2 config port_vlan 1 4 gvrp_state enable ingress checking enable DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to enable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Syntax enable gvrp Description This command along with disable gvrp below is used to enable and disable GVRP on the Switch without changing the GVRP configuration on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP DAS 3626 admin enable gvrp Command enable gvrp Success DAS 3626 admin 140 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual disable gvrp Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to disable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP disable gvrp This command along with enable gvrp is used to enable and disable GVRP on the Switch without changing the GVRP configuration on the Switch
43. 0 0 Transmit Statistics Query IGMP v1 Query IGMP v2 Query IGMP v3 Query Total Report amp Leave IGMP v1 Report IGMP v2 Report IGMP v3 Report IGMP v2 Leave Total Total Entries DAS 3626 admin 174 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual IGMP Mutticast VLAN Commanps The IGMP Multicast VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create igmp_ snooping lt vlan_name 32 gt lt vlanid 2 4094 gt multicast_vlan config igmp_snooping lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete member_port lt portlist gt tag_member_port multicast_vlan lt portlist gt source_port lt portlist gt state enable disable replace_source_ip lt ipaddr gt config igmp_snooping lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete profile_name lt profile_name 1 32 gt lt vlan_name multicast_vlan_group 32 gt show igmp_snooping lt vlan_name 32 gt multicast_vlan_group delete igmp_snooping lt vlan_name 32 gt multicast_vlan enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan show igmp_snooping lt vlan_name 32 gt multicast_vlan create igmp_ snooping lt profile_name 1 32 gt multicast_vlan_group_ profile config igmp_snooping lt profile_name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcast_address_list gt multicast_vlan_group_profile delete igmp_snooping profile_name lt profile_name 1 32 g
44. 1 1 1 229 default 1 12 3 257 INCLUDE 29 1 1 2 229 default 1 12 3 257 INCLUDE 29 1 1 3 229 default 1 12 3 257 INCLUDE 29 1 1 4 229 default 1 12 3 257 INCLUDE 168 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show igmp_snooping rate_limit Purpose Used to show rate limitation Syntax show igmp_snooping rate_limit ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt Description This command is used to display the rate of IGMP control packet that is allowed per port or VLAN Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports that will be displayed lt vianid_list gt Specifies a VLAN or range of VLANs that will be displayed Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To show rate limitation DAS 3626 admini show igmp_ snooping rate limit ports 1 Command show igmp snooping rate limit ports 1 No Limitation Total Entries 1 DAS 3626 admin config igmp_snooping rate_limit Purpose Used to show rate limitation Syntax config igmp_snooping rate_limit ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt value 1 1000 gt no_limit Description This command is used to configure the rate of IGMP control packets that are allowed per port or VLAN Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports that will be displayed lt vianid_list gt Specifies a VLAN or rang
45. 121 Success DAS 3626 admin config arp_aging time Purpose Used to configure the age out timer for ARP table entries on the Switch Syntax config arp_aging time lt value 0 65535 gt Description This command sets the maximum amount of time in minutes that an ARP entry can remain in the Switch s ARP table without being accessed before it is dropped from the table Parameters time lt value 0 65535 gt The ARP age out time in minutes The value may be set in the range of 0 to 65535 minutes with a default setting of 20 minutes Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure ARP aging time DAS 3626 admini config arp aging time 30 Command config arp_aging time 30 Success DAS 3626 admin 76 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show arpentry Purpose Used to display the ARP table Syntax show arpentry ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt static Description This command is used to display the current contents of the Switch s ARP table Parameters ipif lt ipif_ name 12 gt The name of the IP interface the end node or station for which the ARP table entry was made resides on ipaddress lt ipaddr gt The network address corresponding to the IP interface name above static Displays the static entries to the ARP table Restrictions None Example usage To display the A
46. 8 16 gt An alphanumeric string of between 8 and 16 characters that will be used to encrypt the contents of messages the host sends to the agent lt priv_key 32 32 gt Enter an alphanumeric key string of exactly 32 characters in hex form that will be used to encrypt the contents of messages the host sends to the agent none Adding this parameter will add no encryption Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an SNMP user on the Switch DAS 3626 admini create snmp user dlink default encrypted by password auth md5 canadian priv none Command create snmp user dlink default encrypted by password auth md5 canadian priv DAS 3626 admin 88 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to remove an SNMP user from an SNMP group and also to delete the associated SNMP group Syntax delete snmp user lt user_name 32 gt Description This command is used to remove an SNMP user from its SNMP group and then deletes the associated SNMP group Parameters lt user_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that identifies the SNMP user that will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a previously entered SNMP user on the Switch DAS 3626 admin delete snmp user dlink Command delete snmp user dlink Success DAS 3626 admin show snmp user Pu
47. 993 2 enable G 993 2 RFI band disable disable RFI band Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile vdsl profile RFI DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default RFI G 993 2 Command config vdsl profile name default RFI G 993 2 Success DAS 3626 admin 433 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile ReducedPSD Purpose Used to config vdsl profile reduce PSDI Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt ReducedPSD ds1 us1 both disable 0 enable 1 Description This command is used to config vdsl profile reduce PSD Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed ReducedPSD To config VDSL profile reduce PSD ds1 downstream band 1 us1 upstream band 1 both upstream band 1 and downstream band 1 disable enable enable disable upstream band 1 and downstream band 1 reduce PSD Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile vdsl profile reduce PSD DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default ReducedPSD ds1 disable Command config vdsl profile name default ReducedPSD ds1 disable Success DAS 3626 admin 434 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile
48. Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile rate adaptive method DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default RateAdaptive fix Command config vdsl profile name default RateAdaptive fix Success DAS 3626 admin 428 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile RaAMode Purpose Used to config vdsl profile rate adaptive mode Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt RaMode decrease increase decrease Description This command is used to rate adaptive mode Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed RaMode To config VDSL profile rate adaptive mode decrease The vdsl line will retrain if line condition is below minimum SNR increase decrease The vdsl line will retrain if line condition is above maximum SNR or below minimum SNR Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile rate adaptive mode DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default RaMode decrease Command config vdsl profile name default RaMode decrease Success DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile MaxTxRate MaxRxRate MinTxRate MinRxRate Purpose Used to config vdsl profile maximum and minimum RX TX rate Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60
49. Command config stp instance _id 2 remove vlan 10 Success DAS 3626 admin 224 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 225 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete stp instance_id Purpose Used to delete a STP instance ID from the Switch Syntax delete stp instance_id lt value 1 15 gt Description This command allows the user to delete a previously configured STP instance ID from the Switch Parameters ae 1 15 gt Enter a value between 1 and 15 to identify the Spanning Tree instance on the witch 226 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete stp instance_id Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 227 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To delete STP instance ID 2 from the Switch 228 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini delete stp instance_id 2 Command delete stp instance id 2 Success DAS 3626 admin 229 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 230 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp priority Used to configure the bridge priority Purpose Syntax Description Parameters config stp priority lt value 0 61440 gt instance_id lt value 0 15 gt This command is used to update the
50. Command disable ssh Success DAS 3626 admin 315 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 316 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config ssh authmode Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to configure the SSH authentication mode setting config ssh authmode password publickey hostbased enable disable This command is used to configure the SSH authentication mode for users attempting to access the Switch password This parameter may be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a locally configured password for authentication on the Switch publickey This parameter may be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a publickey configuration set on a SSH server for authentication hostbased This parameter may be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a host computer for authentication This parameter is intended for Linux users requiring SSH authentication techniques and the host computer is running the Linux operating system with a SSH program previously installed enable disable This allows users to enable or disable SSH authentication on the Switch 317 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config ssh authmode Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 318 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example us
51. Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters show external_alarm config external_alarm channel lt value 1 4 gt message lt sentence 1 128 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections show external_alarm Purpose Used to display the current external alarm status on the Switch Syntax show external_alarm Description This command is used to display the current external alarm status on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the current external alarm on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show external_alarm Command show external_alarm Channel Status Alarm Message Normal External Alarm 1 Occurred Normal External Alarm 2 Occurred Normal External Alarm 3 Occurred Normal External Alarm 4 Occurred iJe is Next Page js Previous Page fg Refresh config external_alarm Purpose Used to configure the external alarm prompt messages on the Switch Syntax config external_alarm channel lt value 1 4 gt message lt sentence 1 128 gt Description This command is used to set the message to be displayed on console when external alarm occurs Parameters channel used to select one of the 4 channels message prompt message Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 84 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage
52. DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config mid_snooping mrouter_ports Purpose Used to configure ports as router ports Syntax config mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command is used to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast enabled routers This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the multicast enabled router regardless of protocol etc Parameters vian_name The name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured vlanid list The VIDs of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured add delete Specifies to add or delete the router ports portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set up port range 1 10 to be static router ports DAS 3626 admini config mld_snooping mrouter_ ports vlan default add 1 10 Command config mld_snooping mrouter ports vlan default add 1 10 Success DAS 3626 admin config mid_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden Purpose Used to configure ports as forbidden router ports Syntax config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command is used to designate a range of ports as being not
53. DAS 3626 admin To delete ports from a VLAN DAS 3626 admin config vlan v1 delete 6 8 Command config vlan vl delete 6 8 Success DAS 3626 admin config vian vianid Purpose Used to add additional ports to a previously configured VLAN Syntax config vlan vianid lt vidlist gt add tagged untagged forbidden delete lt portlist gt advertisement enable disable name lt name gt Description This command allows you to add or delete ports of the port list of previously configured VLAN s You can specify the additional ports as being tagged untagged or forbidden The same port is allowed to be an untagged member port of multiple VLAN s You can also specify if the ports will join GVRP or not with the advertisement parameter The name parameter allows you to specify the name of the VLAN that needs to be modified Parameters lt vidlist gt Specifies a range of multiple VLAN IDs to be configured tagged Specifies the additional ports as tagged untagged Specifies the additional ports as untagged forbidden Specifies the additional ports as forbidden lt portlist gt A range of ports to add to the VLAN advertisement Entering the advertisement parameter specifies if the port should join GVRP or not There are two parameters enable Specifies that the port should join GVRP Disable Specifies that the port should not join GVRP name Entering the name parameter specifies t
54. In addition the syntax of the help prompts are the same as presented in this manual angle brackets lt gt indicate a numerical value or character string braces indicate optional parameters or a choice of parameters and brackets indicate required parameters If a command is entered that is unrecognized by the CLI the top level commands will be displayed under the Available commands prompt DAS 3626 admin the Available commands Es cfm clear config create delete disable download enable login logout ping ping6 reboot reconfig reset save show upload DAS 3626 admin Figure 2 5 The Next Available Commands Prompt The top level commands consist of commands such as show or config Most of these commands require one or more parameters to narrow the top level command This is equivalent to show what or config what Where the what is the next parameter For example if users enter the show command with no additional parameters the CLI will then display all of the possible next parameters DAS 3626 admin show Command show Next possible completions 802 1p 802 1x accounting alarm attack_log authen authen_policy authentication bpdu filter cfm current_config dhcp_relay dscp_replace_priority fdb filter gvrp hardware ipif_ipv6 link_local_auto jumbo_frame lacp_port link_aggregation log log_support_module mac spoof detect max_mcast_group mirror mld_snooping multicast _fdb packet port_vlan ports radi
55. MEP of this MA defer Inherit the settings configured for the maintenance domain that this MA is associated with This is the default value ccm_interval Specifies the CCM interval 10ms 10 milliseconds Not recommended For test purposes 100ms 100 milliseconds Not recommended For test purposes 1sec One second 10sec Ten seconds This is the default value 1min One minute 10min Ten minutes mepid Specify the MEPIDs contained in the maintenance association The range of MEPID is 1 8191 add Add MEPID s delete Specifies to delete MEPID s By default there s no MEPID in a newly created maintenance association Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure CFM maintenance association DAS 3626 admini config cfm ma opl md op domain vlanid 1 ccm_interval lsec Command config cfm ma opl md op domain vlanid 1 ccm_interval 1sec Success DAS 3626 admin 258 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create cfm mep Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to create a cfm MEP create cfm mep lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt direction inward outward port lt port gt Different MEP in the same MA must have different MEP ID MD name MA name and MEP ID together can identify a MEP Different MEP on the s
56. None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To disable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP DAS 3626 admin disable gvrp Command disable gvrp Success DAS 3626 admin show vlan Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the current VLAN configuration on the Switch show vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt This command displays summary information about each VLAN including the VLAN ID VLAN name the Tagging Untagging status and the Member Non member Forbidden status of each port that is a member of the VLAN lt vian_name 32 gt The VLAN name of the VLAN for which to display a summary of settings None To display the Switch s current VLAN settings 141 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show vlan Command show vlan VID eon VLAN Name default VLAN Type Static Advertisement Enabled Member Ports 1 12 Static Ports 1 12 Current Tagged Ports Current Untagged Ports 1 12 Static Tagged Ports Static Untagged Ports 1 12 Forbidden Ports VID 12 VLAN Name v1 VLAN Type Static Advertisement Disabled Member Ports Static Ports Current Tagged Ports Current Untagged Ports Static Tagged Ports Static Untagged Ports Forbidden Ports Total Entries 2 DAS 3626 admin DAS 3626 admin show vlan ports
57. Reference Manual Example usage To display the currently configured SNMP hosts on the Switch 106 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show snmp host Command show snmp host SNMP Host Table Host IP Address SNMP Version Community Name SNMPv3 User Name 10 48 76 23 private 10 48 74 100 authpriv public Total Entries DAS 3626 admin 107 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 108 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show snmp v6host Purpose Used to display the recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Syntax show snmp v6host lt ipv6addr gt Description This command is used to display the IP addresses and configuration information of remote SNMP managers that are designated as recipients of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Parameters lt ipv6addr gt The IPv6 address of a remote SNMP manager that will receive SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent 109 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show snmp v6host Restrictions None 110 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the currently configured SNMP hosts on the Switch 111 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show snmp v6host Command show snmp v 6ho
58. Reference Manual delete vian_counter Purpose This command deletes the control entry for VLAN traffic flow statistics Syntax delete vian_counter all vlan lt vlan_name gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Description This command deletes the control entry for VLAN traffic flow statistics Parameters all Specifies to delete all VLAN statistic control entries vian_name Specifies the VLAN name vidlist Specifies a list of VLANs by VLAN ID Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To stop counting packet levels for broadcast packets on VLAN 1 DAS 3626 admini delete vlan_counter vlanid 1 Command delete vlan_counter vlanid 1 Success DAS 3626 admin clear vian_counter statistics Purpose Used to clear statistics gathered by the VLAN counter Syntax clear vlan_counter statistics Description This command is used to clear statistic gathered by the VLAN counter Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear statistics for VLAN 1 10 DAS 3626 admin clear vlan_counter statistics Command clear vlan_counter statistics Success DAS 3626 admin 274 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show vlan_counter utilization Purpose This commands displays the statistic control entries created for VLANs Syntax show vlan_counter utilizatio
59. STP instance configuration settings on the Switch The MSTP will utilize the priority in selecting the root bridge root port and designated port Assigning higher priorities to STP regions will instruct the Switch to give precedence to the selected instance_id for forwarding packets The lower the priority value set the higher the priority priority lt value 0 61440 gt Select a value between 0 and 61440 to specify the priority for a specified instance ID for forwarding packets The lower the value the higher the priority This value must be divisible by 4096 instance_id lt value 0 15 gt Enter the value corresponding to the previously configured instance ID of which the user wishes to set the priority value An instance id of 0 denotes the default instance_id CIST internally set on the Switch 231 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp priority Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 232 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To set the priority value for instance_id 2 as 4096 233 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini config stp priority 4096 instance id 2 Command config stp priority 4096 instance id 2 Success DAS 3626 admin 234 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 235 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet
60. Status Cross connect CCM Received DAS 3600 12 4 show cfm port Purpose This command is used to show MEPs and MIPs created on a port Syntax show cfm port lt port gt level lt int 0 7 gt direction inward outward vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to show MEPs and MIPs created on a port Parameters port Specifies the port number level Specifies the MD Level If not specified all levels are shown direction Specifies the MEP direction inward Inward facing MEP outward Outward facing MEP If not specified both directions and MIPs are shown Vianid VLAN identifier If not specified all VLANs are shown Restrictions None Example usage To display CFM ports DAS 3600 12 4 show cfm port 1 Command show cfm port 1 MAC Address 10 10 90 08 8g 12 op_domain inward cust _domain custl inward serv domain serv2 DAS 3600 12 4 266 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show cfm mipccm Purpose This command is used to show MIPCCM database entries Syntax show cfm mipccm Description This command is used to display all entries in the MIPCCM The MIPCCM entry is simlar to FDB which keeps the forwarding port information for a MAC entry Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the MIPCCM database entries DAS 3626 admin show cfm mipccm Command show cfm mipccm 00 01 02 03 04 05 2 00 0
61. Success DAS 3626 admin 295 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual disable port_security trap_log Purpose Used to disable the trap log for port security Syntax disable port_security trap_log Description This command is used to disable a port security trap log If the port security trap is disabled no trap will be sent out for MAC violations Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the port security trap log setting DAS 3626 admin disable port_security trap_log Command disable port_security trap_log Success DAS 3626 admin 296 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual SSL Commanps Secure Sockets Layer or SSL is a security feature that will provide a secure communication path between a host and client through the use of authentication digital signatures and encryption These security functions are implemented through the use of a ciphersuite which is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session and consists of three levels 1 Key Exchange The first part of the cyphersuite string specifies the public key algorithm to be used This Switch utilizes the Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA public key algorithm and the Digital Signature Algorithm DSA specified
62. Switch Syntax disable snmp traps Description This command is used to disable SNMP trap support on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To prevent SNMP traps from being sent from the Switch DAS 3626 admin disable snmp traps Command disable snmp traps Success DAS 3626 admin 116 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual disable snmp authenticate_traps Purpose Used to disable SNMP authentication trap support Syntax disable snmp authenticate_traps Description This command is used to disable SNMP authentication support on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the SNMP authentication trap support DAS 3626 admini disable snmp authenticate_traps Command disable snmp authenticate traps Success DAS 3626 admin config snmp system_contact Purpose Used to enter the name of a contact person who is responsible for the Switch Syntax config snmp system_contact lt sw_contact gt Description This command is used to enter the name and or other information to identify a contact person who is responsible for the Switch A maximum of 255 character can be used Parameters lt sw_contact gt A maximum of 255 characters is allowed A NULL string is accepted if there is no contact Restrictions On
63. The uploaded file from the switch will replace this file Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To upload the master s dangerous log DAS 3626 admin upload attack_log toTFTP 10 90 90 1 C alert txt Command upload attack_log toTFTP 10 90 90 1 C alert txt Success DAS 3626 admin config system_severity Purpose To configure system_severity level of an alert required for log entry or trap message Syntax config system_severity trap log all critical warning information Description This command is used to configure the system_severity levels on the Switch When an event occurs on the Switch a message will be sent to the SNMP agent trap the Switch s log or both Events occurring on the Switch are separated into three main categories these categories are NOT precisely the same as the parameters of the same name see below e Information Events classified as information are basic events occurring on the Switch that are not deemed as problematic such as enabling or disabling various functions on the Switch Warning Events classified as warning are problematic events that are not critical to the overall function of the Switch but do require attention such as unsuccessful downloads or uploads and failed logins Critical Events classified as critical are fatal exceptions occurring on the Switch such as hardware failures or spoofing attacks Paramete
64. This may cause incorrect packet forwarding decisions by the Switch If the aging time is too short however many entries may be aged out too soon This will result in a high percentage of received packets whose source addresses cannot be found in the forwarding table in which case the Switch will broadcast the packet to all ports negating many of the benefits of having a switch lt sec 10 1000000 gt The aging time for the MAC address forwarding database value The value in seconds may be between 10 and 1000000 seconds Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To set the FDB aging time DAS 3626 admini config fdb aging time 300 Command config fdb aging _time 300 Success DAS 3626 admin delete fdb Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete an entry to the Switch s forwarding database delete fdb lt vlan_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt This command is used to delete a previous entry to the Switch s MAC address forwarding database lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt macaddr gt The MAC address that will be added to the forwarding table Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete a permanent FDB entry DAS 3626 admin delete fdb default 00 00 00 00 01 02 Command delete fdb default 00 00 00 00 01 02 Success DAS 3626 admin 249 DAS 3
65. and MSTP on the Switch Syntax maxage lt value 6 40 gt maxhops lt value 1 20 gt hellotime lt value 1 2 gt forwarddelay lt value 4 30 gt txholdcount lt value 1 10 gt fbpdu enable disable nni_bpdu_addr dot1d dottad Description This command is used to setup the Spanning Tree Protocol STP for the entire Switch All commands here will be implemented for the STP version that is currently set on the Switch Parameters maxage lt value 6 40 gt This value may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate through redundant paths in the network preventing the effective propagation of the new information Set by the Root Bridge this value will aid in determining that the Switch has spanning tree configuration values consistent with other devices on the bridged LAN If the value ages out and a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge the Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge The user may choose a time between 6 and 40 seconds The default value is 20 maxhops lt value 1 20 gt The number of hops between devices in a spanning tree region before the BPDU bridge protocol data unit packet sent by the Switch will be discarded Each switch on the hop count will reduce the hop count by one until the value reaches zero The Switc
66. are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config mirror port lt port gt add delete source ports lt portlist gt rx tx both enable mirror show mirror disable mirror Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config mirror port Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to configure a mirror port source port pair on the Switch Traffic from any source port to a target port can be mirrored for real time analysis A logic analyzer or an RMON probe can then be attached to study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely obtrusive manner config mirror port lt port gt add delete source ports lt portlist gt rx tx both This command allows a range of ports to have all of their traffic also sent to a designated port where a network sniffer or other device can monitor the network traffic In addition users can specify that only traffic received by or sent by one or both is mirrored to the Target port lt port gt This specifies the Target port the port where mirrored packets will be received The target port must be configured in the same VLAN and must be operating at the same speed as the source port If the target port is operating at a lower speed the source port will be forced to drop its operating speed to match that of the target port add delete Specifies if the use
67. as a boot up section Parameters image_id Specifies the working section The Switch can hold two firmware versions for the user to select from which are specified by image ID delete Entering this parameter will delete the specified firmware section boot_up Entering this parameter will specify the firmware image ID as a boot up section Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 38 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure firmware image as a boot up section DAS 3626 admini config firmware image_id 1 boot_up Command config firmware image_id 1 boot_up Success DAS 3626 admin show firmware information Purpose Used to display the firmware section information Syntax show firmware information Description This command is used to display the firmware section information Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the current firmware information on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show firmware information Command show firmware information Image ID 1 Boot up firmware Version 1 00 B035 Size 2562816 Bytes Update Time 2000 01 01 00 13 55 From 10 73 21 1 Console User Anonymous Image ID 2 Version Empty Size Update Time From DAS 3626 admin 39 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show config Purpose Used to display the current or s
68. both 2 disable 0 enable 1 PSDBreakPointTx PSDBreakPointRx numpsd lt int 0 32 gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt 412 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters delete vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt show vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt all temp run cl
69. can issue this command Example usage To enable SSL on the Switch for all ciphersuites DAS 3626 admin enable ssl Command enable ssl Note Web will be disabled if SSL is enabled Success DAS 3626 admin NOTE Enabling SSL on the Switch will enable all ciphersuites To utilize a particular ciphersuite the user must eliminate other ciphersuites by using the disable ssl command along with the appropriate ciphersuites NOTE Enabling the SSL function on the Switch will disable the port for the web manager port 80 To log on to the web based manager the entry of the URL must begin with https ex https 10 90 90 90 298 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual disable ssl Purpose To disable the SSL function on the Switch Syntax disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 Description This command will disable SSL on the Switch and can be used to disable any one or combination of listed ciphersuites on the Switch Parameters ciphersuite A security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session The user may choose any combination of the following RSA_with_RC4_128 MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128 bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm
70. clock in hours and minutes 123 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config dst e_time Configure the time of day to end DST lt end_time hh mm gt Time is expressed using a 24 hour clock in hours and minutes s_date Configure the specific date day of the month to begin DST lt start_date 1 31 gt The start date is expressed numerically e_date Configure the specific date day of the month to begin DST e lt end_date 1 31 gt The end date is expressed numerically offset 30 60 90 120 Indicates number of minutes to add or to subtract during the summertime The possible offset times are 30 60 90 120 The default value is 60 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure daylight savings time on the Switch DAS 3626 admini config dst repeating s_ week 2 s day tue s mth 4 s time 15 00 e week 2 e day wed e mth 10 e time 15 30 offset 30 Command config dst repeating s_week 2 s day tue s_mth 4 s_time 15 00 e week 2 e day wed e mth 10 e time 15 30 offset 30 Success DAS 3626 admin show time Purpose Used to display the current time settings and status Syntax show time Description This command will display system time and date configuration as well as display current system time Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the time currently set on the S
71. configure MLD snooping static group information lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to configure MLD snooping static group information lt jpv6addr gt The static group IPv6 address for which to configure MLD snooping static group information add delete lt portlist gt Portlist to add or delete Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add port 5 to static group FF12 1 on VID 1 DAS 3626 admini config mld_snooping static_group vlanid 1 FF12 1 add 5 Command config mld_snooping static group vlanid 1 FF12 1 add 5 Success DAS 3626 admin 201 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show mld_snooping statistic counter Purpose Used to view the current MLD snooping statistic on the Switch Syntax show mld_snooping statistic counter vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to view this information MLD snooping must be enabled first Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view MLD snooping statistic counter lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN ID for which to view MLD snooping statistic counter lt portlist gt The list of the ports for which to view MLD snooping statistic counter Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Examp
72. configure the method to save log Syntax config log_save_timing time_interval lt min 1 65535 gt on_demand log_ trigger Description This command is used to set the method to save log Parameters time_interval save log to flash every xxx minutes if no log happen in this period don t save on_demand save log to flash whenever user type save log or save all This is also the default log_trigger save log to flash whenever log arrives Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure log save_timing DAS 3626 admini config log _save_timing on_demand Command config log _save_timing on_demand Success DAS 3626 admin show log_save_timing Purpose Used to show the timing method to save log Syntax show log_save_timing Description This command is used to show method to save log Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage 462 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual To show log save_timing DAS 3626 admin show log _save_timing Command show log _save_timing Saving Log Method On_demand DAS 3626 admin show attack_log Purpose Used to show dangerous log messages Syntax show attack_log index lt value_list gt Description This command is used to show content of dangerous log messages Parameters value_list X Y The show log command will display the dangerous log messages between t
73. default entry VIDs can belong to only one spanning tree instance at a time lt value 1 15 gt Enter a number between 1 and 15 to define the instance_id The Switch supports 16 STP instances with one unchangeable default instance ID set as 0 add_vian Along with the vid_range lt vidlist gt parameter this command will add VIDs to the previously configured STP instance_id remove_vian Along with the vid_range lt vidlist gt parameter this command will remove VIDs to the previously configured STP instance_id lt vidlist gt Specify the VID range from configured VLANs set on the Switch Supported VIDs on the Switch range from ID number 1 to 4094 219 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp instance_id Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 220 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure instance ID 2 to add VID 10 221 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini config stp instance_id 2 add vlan 10 Command config stp instance_id 2 add vlan 10 Success DAS 3626 admin 222 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To remove VID 10 from instance ID 2 223 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini config stp instance_id 2 remove vlan 10
74. destination MAC address mepname Specifies the MEP name mepid MEP MEPID md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name trans_id Specifies the identifier of the transaction to show Restrictions None Example usage To display the CFM linktrace DAS 3626 admini show cfm linktrace mepname 3 trans _id 1 Command show cfm linktrace mepname 3 trans_id 1 Transaction ID 1 From MEP 3 to 00 50 BA 50 11 51 Start Time 2009 08 11 03 18 15 MAC Address Last Egress ID Reply Ingress MAC Port Action Hop Relay Forwarded Next Egress ID Reply Egress MAC Port Action 00 80 C8 37 18 F1 00 80 C8 37 18 F0O Yes 00 80 C8 37 18 F0O 00 80 C8 37 18 F1 1 Ok Hit 00 50 BA 50 11 51 00 80 C8 37 18 F0O 00 50 BA 50 11 51 wan Ok No 5 DAS 3626 admin delete cfm linktrace Purpose This command is used to delete received linktrace responses Syntax delete cfm linktrace md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt mepname lt string 32 gt Description This command deletes the stored link trace response data that is initiated by the specified MEP Parameters mepname Specifies the MEP name mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name Restrictions None 268 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To delete a CFM l
75. displayed None To display the switch history log DAS 3626 admin show log index 1 5 Command show log index 1 5 Index Date 2000 01 03 Logout through Console Username Anonymous 2000 01 03 2000 01 03 2000 01 03 2000 01 03 Successful login through Console Username Anonymous Port 3 link up 1000Mbps FULL duplex Port 7 link up 100Mbps FULL duplex System started up DAS 3626 admin 455 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual this window please refer to Appendix C at the back of the DAS 3600 p NOTE For detailed information regarding Log entries that will appear in 12 Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual enable syslog Purpose Used to enable the system log to be sent to a remote host Syntax enable syslog Description This command is used to enable the system log to be sent to a remote host Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To the Syslog function on the Switch DAS 3626 admin enable syslog Command enable syslog Success DAS 3626 admin disable syslog Purpose Used to disable the system log to be sent to a remote host Syntax disable syslog Description This command is used to disable the system log to be sent to a remote host Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To
76. dropped Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set unmatched packet to be flooded on the VLAN DAS 3626 admini config mld_snooping multicast vlan forward_unmatched enable Command config mld_ snooping multicast_vlan forward unmatched enable Success DAS 3626 admin 190 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual MLD Snoopinc Commanp List The MLD Snooping Commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all state enable disable fast_done enable disable report_suppression enable disable config mld_snooping querier vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all query_interval lt sec 1 65535 gt max_response_time lt sec 1 25 gt robustness_variable lt value 1 255 gt last_listener_query_interval lt sec 1 25 gt state enable disable version lt value 1 2 gt config mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt mrouter_ports config mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt mrouter_ports_ forbidden show mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt show mld_snooping group vlan lt vlan_name 32 g
77. e radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server e server_group lt string 15 gt Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch e local Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch e none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch 352 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config authen_login Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the user defined method list Trinity with authentication methods TACACS XTACACS and local in that order DAS 3626 admin config authen_login method _list_name Trinity method tacacs xtacacs local Command config authen_login method list_name Trinity method tacacs xtacacs local Success DAS 3626 admin Example usage To configure the default method list with authentication methods XTACACS TACACS and local in that order DAS 3626 admin config authen_login default method xtacacs tacacs local Command config authen_login default method xtacacs tacacs local Success DAS 3626 admin delete authen_login method_list_name Purpose Used to delete a previously configured user defined method list of authentication me
78. functioning The user may choose a time between 1 and 2 seconds The default is 2 seconds migrate yes no Setting this parameter as yes will set the ports to send out BDPU packets to other bridges requesting information on their STP setting If the Switch is configured for RSTP the port will be capable to migrate from 802 1D STP compatible to 802 1D RSTP If the Switch is configured for MSTP the port is capable of migrating from 802 1D STP compatible to 802 1Q MSTP RSTP and MSTP can coexist with standard STP however the benefits of RSTP and MSTP are not realized on a port where an 802 1D network connects to an 802 1D 2004 or 802 1Q enabled network Migration should be set as yes on ports connected to network stations or segments that are capable of being upgraded to 802 1D 2004 RSTP or 802 1Q MSTP on all or some portion of the segment edge true false auto true designates the port as an edge port Edge ports cannot create loops however an edge port can lose edge port status if a topology change creates a potential for a loop An edge port normally should not receive BPDU packets If a BPDU packet is received it automatically loses edge port status fa se indicates that the port does not have edge port status Auto Will indicate that the port will be able to automatically enable edge port status if needed restricted_role true false f true causes the Port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any M
79. gt DAS 3626 admin Figure 2 3 Example Command Parameter Help In this case the command config account was entered with the parameter lt username gt The CLI will then prompt users to enter the lt username gt with the message Next possible completions Every command in the CLI has this feature and complex commands have several layers of parameter prompting In addition after typing any given command plus one space users can see all of the next possible sub commands in sequential order by repeatedly pressing the Tab key To re enter the previous command at the command prompt press the up arrow cursor key The previous command will appear at the command prompt DAS 3626 admin tconfig account Command config account Next possible completions lt username gt DAS 3626 admin tconfig account Command config account Next possible completions lt username gt DAS 3626 admin Figure 2 4 Using the Up Arrow to Re enter a Command DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual In the above example the command config account was entered without the required parameter lt username gt the CLI returned the Next possible completions lt username gt prompt The up arrow cursor control key was pressed to re enter the previous command config account at the command prompt Now the appropriate username can be entered and the config account command re executed All commands in the CLI function in this way
80. gt group_name lt name 32 gt add protocol ethernet_2 ieee802 3_snap ieee802 3 IIc lt protocol_value gt config dot1v_protocol_ group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt delete protocol ethernet_2 ieee802 3_ snap ieee802 3_ IIc lt protocol_value gt delete dot1v_protocol_group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt all show dot1v_protocol_ group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt config port dot1v ports lt portlist gt all add protocol_ group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt id gt priority lt value 0 7 gt delete protocol_ group group_id lt id 1 16 gt all show port dot1v ports lt portlist gt show show pvid auto_assign auto_assign config gvrp EE leave leaveall lt value 100 100000 gt nni_bpdu_addr dot1d otla showgvp sd gvrp Each command is listed in detail in L following sections 125 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create vian Purpose Used to create a VLAN on the Switch Syntax create vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt tag lt vianid 2 4094 gt type 1q_vlan advertisement Description This command allows the user to create a VLAN on the Switch Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN to be created lt vianid 2 4094 gt The VLAN ID of the VLAN to be created Allowed values 2 4094 adver
81. gt name lt profile_name 32 gt MaxTxRate MaxRxRate MinTxRate MinRxRate lt vdsl_ speed 32 104960 gt Description This command is used to rate adaptive mode Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed MaxTxRate MaxRxRate MinTxRate MinRxRate To config VDSL profile maximum and minimum RX TX rate lt vdsl_speed 32 104960 gt vds speed minimum is 32kbps maximum is 104960kbps The scale is 1 kbps Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile maximum and minimum RX TX rate DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default MaxTxRate 50000 Command config vdsl profile name default MaxTxRate 50000 Success DAS 3626 admin 429 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile SnrMarginTx SnrMarginRx Purpose Used to config vdsl profile TX RX SNR margin Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt SnrMarginTx SnrMarginRx max lt vdsl_snr_max 0 62 gt min lt vdsl_snr_min 0 62 gt target lt vdsl_snr_target 0 62 gt Description This command is used to config vdsl profile TX RX SNR margin Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed SnrMarginTx SnrMarginRx To config VDSL pr
82. here as the DHE_DSS Diffie Hellman DHE public key algorithm This is the first authentication process between client and host as they exchange keys in looking for a match and therefore authentication to be accepted to negotiate encryptions on the following level 2 Encryption The second part of the ciphersuite that includes the encryption used for encrypting the messages sent between client and host The Switch supports two types of cryptology algorithms e Stream Ciphers There are two types of stream ciphers on the Switch RC4 with 40 bit keys and RC4 with 128 bit keys These keys are used to encrypt messages and need to be consistent between client and host for optimal use e CBC Block Ciphers CBC refers to Cipher Block Chaining which means that a portion of the previously encrypted block of encrypted text is used in the encryption of the current block The Switch supports the 3DES EDE encryption code defined by the Data Encryption Standard DES to create the encrypted text 3 Hash Algorithm This part of the ciphersuite allows the user to choose a message digest function which will determine a Message Authentication Code This Message Authentication Code will be encrypted with a sent message to provide integrity and prevent against replay attacks The Switch supports two hash algorithms MDS Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm These three parameters are uniquely assembled in four choices on the Switch to create
83. host network DAS 3626 admini create trusted_host network 10 62 32 1 16 Command create trusted_host network 10 62 32 1 16 Success show trusted_host Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display a list of trusted hosts entered on the Switch using the create trusted_host command above show trusted_host lt network_address gt This command is used to display a list of trusted hosts entered on the Switch using the create trusted_host command above lt network_address gt the network address to show None To display the list of trust hosts DAS 3626 admin show trusted_host Command show trusted_host 113 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Management Stations IP Address 10 62 32 1 32 10 62 32 1 16 Total Entries 2 delete trusted_host ipaddr Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host command above delete trusted host ipaddr lt ipaddr gt This command is used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host command above lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the trusted host Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete a trusted host with an IP address 10 62 32 1 DAS 3626 admini delete trusted_host ipaddr 10 62 32 1 Command delete trusted_host ipa
84. in administrator level of privilege Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the current configuration access profile on the Switch 408 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini show current _config access profile Command show current_config access profile DAS 3626 admin 409 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual VDSL Commanps The VDSL switch commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table 410 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters show vdsl alarms attenuation line_state profiles rate snrmargin txpower brief_status config vdsl line lt vdsl_portlist gt all state use 1 no_use 0 name lt name gt retrain reset loopback co_side 0 eoc 1 cpe_side 2 times lt int 1 400 gt size lt int 64 1518 gt loop_diagnostic show vdsl line lt vdsl_portlist gt all bit_map snr_margin_map psd_map attenuation_map status brief loop_diagnostic pm_counters 15mins 1day config vdsl 15min O 1day 1 both 2 near_end 0 far_end 1 both_ends 2 es 0 lt threshold gt pm_threshold ses 1 lt threshold gt uas 2 lt threshold gt crc_error 3 lt threshold gt show vdsl pm_threshold create vdsl profile lt profile_name 32 gt
85. interface currently set on the switch Users may specify an IP interface IPv6 address or statically entered IPv6 addresses by which to view the neighbor cache Parameters lt ipif_ name 12 gt Enter the IP interface for which to view IPv6 neighbors This will display all IPv6 neighbors of this interface all Enter this parameter to denote all IPv6 interfaces created on the switch ipv6address lt ipv6addr gt Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor by which to view this information static Enter this parameter to view all statically entered IPv6 neighbors of the switch dynamic Enter this command to view all dynamically configured neighbor devices which are IPv6 neighbors of the IP interface previously entered all Enter this parameter to view all configured neighbor devices which are IPv6 neighbors of the IP interface previously entered Restrictions None 51 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage DAS 3626 admini show ipv6 neighbor cache ipif System all Command show ipv6 neighbor cache ipif System all Link Layer Address Interface 216 36FF FEBS 48DF 00 16 36 B5 48 DF 230 65FF FE98 BFAC 00 30 65 98 BF AC 280 C8FF FE25 9050 00 80 C8 25 90 50 2D0 BAFF FEF4 3282 00 D0 BA F4 32 82 Entries 4 I means Incomplete state R means Reachable state S means Stale state D means Delay state P means Probe state T means Static st
86. ipaddr gt The IP address of the primary server secondary This is the secondary server the SNTP information will be taken from in the event the primary server is unavailable lt ijpaddr gt The IP address for the secondary server poll interval lt int 30 99999 gt This is the interval between requests for updated SNTP information The polling interval ranges from 30 to 99 999 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command SNTP service must be enabled for this command to function enable sntp Example usage To configure SNTP settings DAS 3626 admin tconfig sntp primary 10 1 1 1 secondary 10 1 1 2 poll interval 30 Command config sntp primary 10 1 1 1 secondary 10 1 1 2 poll interval 30 Success DAS 3626 admin 120 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show sntp Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to display the SNTP information show sntp This command will display SNTP settings information including the source IP address time and poll interval None None Example usage To display SNTP configuration information DAS 3626 admin show sntp Command show sntp Current Time Source System Clock SNTP Disabled SNTP Primary Server 10 1 1 1 SNTP Secondary Server 10 1 1 2 SNTP Poll Interval 30 sec DAS 3626 admin enable sntp Purpose To enable SNTP server support Syn
87. ipaddr gt lt metric 1 65535 gt delete iproute default lt ipaddr gt show iproute static Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create iproute default Purpose Used to create IP route entries to the Switch s IP routing table Syntax create iproute default lt ipaddr gt lt metric 1 65535 gt Description This command is used to create a default static IP route entry to the Switch s IP routing table Parameters lt jpaddr gt The gateway IP address for the next hop router lt metric 1 65535 gt Allows the entry of a routing protocol metric entry representing the number of routers between the Switch and the IP address above The default setting is 1 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add the default static address 10 48 74 121 with a metric setting of 1 to the routing table DAS 3626 admin tcreate iproute default 10 48 74 121 1 Command create iproute default 10 48 74 121 1 Success DAS 3626 admin delete iproute default Purpose Used to delete a default IP route entry from the Switch s IP routing table Syntax delete iproute default Description This command will delete an existing default entry from the Switch s IP routing table Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the default IP route 10 53 13 254 D
88. lt int 0 640 gt DPBOESCMB lt int 0 640 gt DPBOESCMC lt int 0 640 gt DPBOMUS lt int 0 255 gt DPBOFMIN lt int 0 2048 gt DPBOFMAX lt int 32 6956 gt DPBOEPSD numpsd lt int 0 32 gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq
89. lt vidlist gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured query_interval Specifies the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions the default setting is 125 seconds max_response_time The maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members The default setting is 10 seconds robustness_variable Provides fine tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet The value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following IGMP message intervals e Group member interval Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more members of a group on a network This interval is calculated as follows robustness variable x query interval 1 x query response interval e Other querier present interval Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the querier This interval is calculated as follows robustness variable x query interval 0 5 x query response interval e Last member query count Number of group specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local members of a group The default number is the value of the robustness variable e By default the robustness variable is set to 2 You might want to increase this value if you expect a subnet to be lossy last_member_query_interval The maximum amount of time between group specif
90. on the Switch Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete the access profile with a profile ID of 1 DAS 3626 admini delete access profile profile id 1 Command delete access profile profile id 1 Success DAS 3626 admin 401 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config access_profile Purpose Syntax Description Used to configure an access profile on the Switch and to define specific values that will be used to by the Switch to determine if a given packet should be forwarded or filtered Masks entered using the create access_profile command will be combined using a logical AND operational method with the values the Switch finds in the specified frame header fields Specific values for the rules are entered using the config access_profile command below config access_profile profile_id lt value 1 1024 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt add access_id auto_assign lt value 1 1024 gt ethernet vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt mask lt hex 0x0 0x0fff gt source_mac lt macaddr gt mask lt macmask gt destination_mac lt macaddr gt mask lt macmask gt 802 1p lt value 0 7 gt ethernet_type lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 1 ipv4 vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vian_id lt value 1 4094 gt mask lt hex 0x0 0x0fff gt source_ip lt ipaddr gt mask lt netmask gt destination_ip lt ipaddr gt mask lt netmask gt
91. or in essence the number of bytes in each ping packet Users may set a size between 1 and 6000 bytes with a default setting of 100 bytes timeout lt value 1 10 gt Select a timeout period between 1 and 10 seconds for this Ping message to reach its destination If the packet fails to find the IPv6 address in this specified time the Ping packet will be dropped None address 1001 3702 four times ing6 1001 3702 times 4 001 3702 times 4 3702 bytes 100 time lt 10 3702 bytes 100 time lt 10 73702 bytes 100 time lt 10 3702 bytes 100 time lt 10 for 1001 3702 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 DAS 3626 admin 43 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Basic IP Commanps The IP interface commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt ipaddress lt network_address gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt state enable disable bootp dhcp ipv6 ipv6address lt ipv6networkaddr gt state enable disable ipv4 state enable disable show ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt enable ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt all disable ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt all enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto lt ipif_name 12 gt all disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto lt ipif_name 12 gt all show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto lt ipif_name 12 gt
92. output reaches the end of the page DAS 3626 admin disable clipaging Command disable clipaging Success DAS 3626 admin 23 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable telnet Purpose Used to enable communication with and management of the Switch using the Telnet protocol Syntax enable telnet lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt Description This command is used to enable the Telnet protocol on the Switch The user can specify the TCP or UDP port number the Switch will use to listen for Telnet requests Parameters lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt The TCP port number TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535 The well known TCP port for the Telnet protocol is 23 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable Telnet and configure port number DAS 3626 admin enable telnet 23 Command enable telnet 23 Success DAS 3626 admin disable telnet Purpose Used to disable the Telnet protocol on the Switch Syntax disable telnet Description This command is used to disable the Telnet protocol on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the Telnet protocol on the Switch DAS 3626 admin disable telnet Command disable telnet Success DAS 3626 admin enable web Purpose Used to enable the HTTP based management sof
93. over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp mst_config_id Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to update the MSTP configuration identification config stp mst_config_id revision_level lt int 0 65535 gt name lt string 32 gt This command will uniquely identify the MSTP configuration currently configured on the Switch Information entered here will be attached to BPDU packets as an identifier for the MSTP region to which it belongs Switches having the same revision_level and name will be considered as part of the same MSTP region revision_level lt int 0 65535 gt Enter a number between 0 and 65535 to identify the MSTP region This value along with the name will identify the MSTP region configured on the Switch The default setting is 0 name lt string gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters to uniquely identify the MSTP region on the Switch This name along with the revision_level value will identify the MSTP region configured on the Switch If no name is entered the default name will be the MAC address of the device 236 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp mst_config_id Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 237 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure the MSTP region of the Switch with revision _level 10 and the name Trinity
94. over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show config current_config Command show config current_config DAS 3600 12 Configuration Firmware Build 1 00 B042 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved BASIC ACCOUNT LIST ACCOUNT END PASSWORD ENCRYPTION disable password encryption config serial port auto_logout 10 minutes enable telnet 23 enable web 80 q Quit nl Next Page ENTER Next Entry al All Purpose Used to upload the current switch settings or the switch history log to a TFTP Syntax cfg_toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt lt path_filename 64 gt log_toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt lt path_filename 64 gt attack_log_toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt lt path_filename 64 gt Description This command is used to upload either the Switch s current settings or the Switch s history log to a TFTP server Parameters cfg_toTFTP Specifies that the Switch s current settings will be uploaded to the TFTP server log_toTFTP Specifies that the switch history log will be uploaded to the TFTP server attack_log_toTFTP Specifies that the switch attack log will be uploaded to the TFTP server lt ijpaddr gt The IP address of the TFTP server The TFTP server must be on the same IP subnet as the Switch lt ipv6adadr gt The IPv6 address of the TFTP server lt path_filename 64 gt Specifies the location of the Switch configuration file on the TFTP
95. port mirroring configuration into the Switch and then turn the port mirroring on and off without having to modify the port mirroring configuration Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable mirroring configurations DAS 3626 admin enable mirror Command enable mirror Success DAS 3626 admin disable mirror Purpose Used to disable a previously entered port mirroring configuration Syntax disable mirror Description This command combined with the enable mirror command above allows the user to enter a port mirroring configuration into the Switch and then turn the port mirroring on and off without having to modify the port mirroring configuration Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 205 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To disable mirroring configurations DAS 3626 admin disable mirror Command disable mirror Success DAS 3626 admin show mirror Purpose Used to show the current port mirroring configuration on the Switch Syntax show mirror Description This command displays the current port mirroring configuration on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display mirroring configuration DAS 3626 admin show mirror Command show mirror Current Settings Enabled DA
96. profile limit PSD mask DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default LimitPSDMask eu32 Command config vdsl profile name default LimitPSDMask eu32 Success DAS 3626 admin 432 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile BitSwap Purpose Used to config vdsl profile bit swap Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt BitSwap disable enable Description This command is used to config vdsl profile bit swap Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed BitSwap To config VDSL profile bit swap enable enable bit swp disable disable bit swap Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile vdsl profile bit swap DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default bit swap enable Command config vdsl profile name default bit swap enable Success DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile RFI Purpose Used to config vdsl profile RFI Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt RFI G 993 2 disable Description This command is used to config vdsl profile bit swap Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed RFI To config VDSL profile RFI G
97. settings will not change even if the user resets or reboots the Switch The li Baud rate will only change when the user configures it again The serial port s baud rate setting is A not stored in the Switch s configuration file Resetting the Switch will not restore the baud rate to the default setting enable clipaging Purpose Used to pause the scrolling of the console screen when a command displays more than one page Syntax enable clipaging Description This command is used when issuing a command which causes the console screen to rapidly scroll through several pages This command will cause the console to pause at the end of each page The default setting is enabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable pausing of the screen display when the show command output reaches the end of the page DAS 3626 admin enable clipaging Command enable clipaging disable clipaging DASHES admin Used to disable the pausing of the console screen scrolling at the end of each page when a Syntax disable clipaging Description This command is used to disable the pausing of the console screen at the end of each page when a command would display more than one screen of information Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable pausing of the screen display when show command
98. show fdb Command show fdb Unicast MAC Address Aging Time 300 VID VLAN Name MAC Address default 00 00 00 1B FC 02 default 00 00 00 E0 06 09 default 00 00 48 CD 25 3A default 00 00 5E 00 01 01 default 00 00 5E 00 01 5F default 00 00 81 00 00 01 default 00 00 81 9A F2 F4 default 00 00 C8 CD 25 3A default 00 00 E2 2F 44 EC default 00 00 EB A4 50 5A default 00 00 F0 78 EB 00 default 00 00 FC 0E 34 3E Dynamic default 00 01 02 03 04 00 CPU Self default 0 01 06 30 00 00 7 Dynamic default 00 01 10 FE 0D 14 7 Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic N N YI YN NYY NN SN NI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 252 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config multicast vlan_filtering_mode Purpose Used to configure the the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs Syntax config multicast vian_filtering_mode vlanid lt vidlist gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt all forward_all_groups forward_unregistered_groups filter_unregistered_groups Description This command is used to configure the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs Port filtering mode and VLAN filtering mode are mutual exclusive Parameters vlanid_list Specifies a range of VLANs to be configured vian_name Specifies the name of the VLANs to be configured The filtering mode can be any of the following forward_all_groups forward_unregistered_groups
99. specified port or group of ports one port at a time Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be viewed Information for a single port is displayed If no ports are specified the STP information for port 1 will be displayed Users may use the Space bar p and n keys to view information for the remaining ports Restrictions None Example usage To show STP ports information for port 1 STP enabled on Switch DAS 3626 admin tshow stp ports Command show stp ports MSTP Port Information Port Index Hello Time 2 2 Port STP Enabled External PathCost Edge Port False No Auto Yes Port RestrictedRole False Port RestrictedTCN False Port Forward BPDU Enabled MSTI Designated Bridge Internal PathCost Prio Status 128 Disabled Disabled 200000 128 Disabled Disabled 200000 128 Disabled Disabled DAS 3626 admin 244 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to display the Switch s STP instance configuration Syntax show stp instance_id lt value 0 15 gt Description This command displays the Switch s current STP Instance Settings and the STP Instance Operational Status Parameters lt value 0 15 gt Enter a value defining the previously configured instance_id on the Switch An entry of 0 will display the STP configuration for the CIST internally set on the Switch Restrictions None Example usage To display the STP
100. status Auto allows the port to have p2p status whenever possible and operate as if the p2p status were true If the port cannot maintain this status for example if the port is forced to half duplex operation the p2p status changes to operate as if the p2p value were false The default setting for this parameter is auto state enable disable Allows STP to be enabled or disabled for the ports specified in the port list The default is enable fbpdu enable disable When enabled this allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices when STP is disabled in the specified ports If users want to enable Forwarding BPDU on a per port basis the following settings must first be in effect 1 216 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp ports STP must be globally disabled and 2 Forwarding BPDU must be globally enabled To globally disable STP use the disable stp command to globally enable fbpdu use the config stp command The default is enable Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure STP with path cost 19 hellotime set to 2 seconds migration enabled and state enabled for ports 1 5 DAS 3626 admin config stp ports 1 5 externalCost 19 hellotime 2 migrate yes state config stp ports 1 5 externalCost 19 hellotime 2 migrate yes state enable DAS 3626 admin create stp instance_id Purpose Used
101. string Parameters lt community_string 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent view lt view_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch read_only Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created with this command can only read the contents of the MIBs on the Switch read_write Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created with this command can read from and write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create the SNMP community string dlink DAS 3626 admin create snmp community dlink view ReadView read write Command create snmp community dlink view ReadView read write Success DAS 3626 admin delete snmp community Purpose Used to remove a specific SNMP community string from the Switch Syntax delete snmp community lt community_string 32 gt Description This command is used to remove a previously defined SNMP community string from the Switch Parameters lt community_string 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify
102. the given method list the user wishes to view all Entering this parameter will display all the authentication login methods currently configured on the Switch The window will display the following parameters e Method List Name The name of a previously configured method list name e Priority Defines which order the method list protocols will be queried for authentication when a user attempts to log on to the Switch Priority ranges from 1 highest to 4 lowest Method Name Defines which security protocols are implemented per method list name Comment Defines the type of Method User defined Group refers to server groups defined by the user Built in Group refers to the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS security protocols which are permanently set in the Switch Keyword refers to authentication using a technique INSTEAD of TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS which are local authentication through the local_enable password on the Switch and none no authentication necessary to access any function on the Switch Restrictions Example usage To display all method lists for promoting user level privileges to administrator level privileges DAS 3626 admini show authen_enable all Command show authen_ enable all Method List Name Priority Method Name Permit tacacs Built in Group tacacs Built in Group Darren User defined Group local Keyword default tacacs Built in Group local Keyword Total Entries 2 D
103. the user Successful authentication using any of these methods will give the user an Admin level privilege DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config authen_enable Parameters default The default method list for administration rights authentication as defined by the user The user may choose one or a combination of up to four 4 of the following authentication methods e tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from the remote TACACS server hosts of the TACACS server group list xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from the remote XTACACS server hosts of the XTACACS server group list tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from the remote TACACS server hosts of the TACACS server group list radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from the remote RADIUS server hosts of the RADIUS server group list server_group lt string 15 gt Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch local_enable Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch e none Adding this parameter will require no authent
104. to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from the remote XTACACS server hosts of the XTACACS server group list e tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from the remote TACACS server hosts of the TACACS server group list e radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from the remote RADIUS server hosts of the RADIUS server group list e server_group lt string 15 gt Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch e local Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch e none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch method_list_name Enter a previously implemented method list name defined by the user The user may add one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods to this method list e tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server e xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server e tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server
105. to enable or disable IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN fast_leave enable disable Allows users to enable or disable IGMP snooping fast leave for the specified VLAN report_suppression enable disable Allows users to enable or disable IGMP snooping report suppression for the specified VLAN Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure IGMP snooping DAS 3626 admini config igmp snooping vlan default state enable fast _leave enable report _suppression disable Command config igmp snooping vlan default state enable fast_leave enable report_suppression disable Success DAS 3626 admin 161 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config igmp_snooping querier Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to configure the the time in seconds between general query transmissions the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members and the permitted packet loss that guarantees IGMP snooping config igmp_snooping querier vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all query_interval lt sec 1 65535 gt max_response_time lt sec 1 25 gt robustness_variable lt value 1 255 gt last_member_query_interval lt sec 1 25 gt state enable disable version lt value 1 3 gt This command is used to configure IGMP snooping querier vian_name The name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured
106. to run loopback test co side Specifies that loop back test is internal eoc Specifies that loop back test is external via VDSL EOC channel cpe side Specifies that loop back test is external via VDSL DATA channel times How many times to run loop back test size Specifies pcket size loop_diagnostic run loop diagnostic on vdsl line Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl line use or no_use DAS 3626 admin config vdsl line 1 state no_use config vdsl line 1 state no_use Success DAS 3626 admin Example usage config vdsl line loopback test DAS 3626 admin config vdsl line 4 loopback eoc times 3 size 64 Command config vdsl line 4 loopback eoc times 3 size 64 Loopback Test mode eoc port 4 time 3 size 64 Test performed 3 success 3 fail 0 Error Ratio 0 0 Loopback Time Statistics 10 ms Max lt 10 ms Min lt 10 ms avr_time lt 10 ms Line 4 loopback test completed DAS 3626 admin 415 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show vdsl line Purpose Used to show VDSL line status Syntax show vdsl line lt portlist gt all bit_map snr_margin_map psd_map attenuation_map status brief loop_diagnostic pm_counters 15mins 1day Description This command is used to show VDSL line status such as bit map SNR margin map PSD map attenuation map line status loop diag
107. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DAS 3626 admin config dscp trust Purpose Enable Disable DSCP trust state Syntax config dscp trust state enable disable Description This command is used to onfigure the port DSCP trust state When DSCP is not trusted 1p is trusted Parameters state Enable disable to trust DSCP By default DSCP trust is disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure DSCP trust state enable DAS 3626 admin config dscp trust state enable Command config dscp trust state enable Success DAS 3626 admin show dscp trust Purpose Used to display DSCP trust state Syntax show dscp trust Description This command is used to display DSCP trsut state Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the DSCP trust state DAS 3626 admin show dscp trust Command show dscp trust DSCP Trust Enabled DAS 3626 admin 283 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config dscp map Purpose config mapping of DSCP to priority and packet s initial color Syntax config dscp map dscp_priority lt dscp 0 63 gt to lt priority 0 7 gt Description The mapping of DSCP to COS will be used to determine the priority of the packet which will be then used to determine the scheduling queue when the port is in DSCP trust state Parameters dscp_priority Specifies a li
108. 00 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 306 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable ssh Purpose Used to enable SSH Syntax enable ssh Description This command allows users to enable SSH on the Switch Parameters None 307 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable ssh Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 308 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Usage example To enable SSH 309 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin enable ssh Command enable ssh Success DAS 3626 admin 310 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual disable ssh Purpose Used to disable SSH Syntax disable ssh Description This command allows users to disable SSH on the Switch Parameters None 312 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual disable ssh Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 313 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Usage example To disable SSH 314 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin disable ssh
109. 1 02 03 04 05 Packets Sent 4 Received 1 Lost 3 75 loss DAS 3600 12 4 show cfm pkt_cnt Purpose Used to show CFM packet RX TX counters Syntax show cfm pkt_cnt ports lt portlist gt rx tx rx tx ccm Description This command is used to display CFM packet counters Parameters ports Specifies which ports counter to show If not specified all ports will be shown rx tx Shows RX or TX packet counter If none is specified both of them are shown ccm Shows the CCM transmission state Restrictions None 270 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage The following example displays the statistics for CFM packets VidDrop The packets dropped due to invalid VID OpcoDrop The packets dropped due to unrecognized CFM opcode DAS 3626 admin show cfm counter packet Command show cfm counter packet CFM RX Statistics VidDrop OpcoDrop Sum O O O O OOOOO O oOoOoOW OOO CO 0 CO 0 Total 254 Woedoedownnaodcnceaoo0 oduod0cad adad oo O O O O OO OOOOO O O O O O O O OO OOOOO O O O O O O O OOOOOOO O O O O O O O O OOOOOO O O O O O O O O OOOOOO O CFM TX Statistics clear cfm pkt_cnt Purpose Used to clear the CFM packet RX TX counters Syntax clear cfm pkt_cnt ports lt portlist gt rx tx rx tx ccm Description This command clears CFM packet counters Parameters ports Specifies which ports counter to show If not specified all port
110. 1 02 03 04 05 3 Total 2 DAS 3626 admin cfm linktrace Purpose This command is used to issue a CFM linktrack message Syntax cfm linktrace lt macaddr gt mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt ttl lt int 2 255 gt pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt Description This command is used to issue a CFM linktrack message Parameters lt macadar gt Specifies the destination MAC address mepname Specifies the MEP name mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name tt Specifies the linktrace message TTL value The default value is 64 pdu_priority The 802 1p priority to be set in the transmitted LTM If not specified it uses the same priority as CCMs sent by the MA Restrictions None Example usage To create a CFM linktrace DAS 3600 12 4 cfm linktrace 00 01 02 03 04 05 mep mep1 Command cfm linktrace 00 01 02 03 04 05 mep mep1 Transaction ID 26 Success DAS 3600 12 4 267 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show cfm linktrace Purpose Used to show linktrace responses Syntax show cfm linktrace mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt trans_id lt uint gt Description The maximum linktrace responses a device can hold is 64 Parameters lt macadar gt Specifies the
111. 1 4 Command show vlan ports 1 4 Untagged Tagged Dynamic Forbidden DAS 3626 admin show port_vlan Purpose Used to display the GVRP status for a port list on the Switch Syntax show port_vlan lt portlist gt Description This command displays the GVRP status for a port list on the Switch Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports for which the GVRP status is to be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display GVRP port status 142 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show port vlan 1 10 Command show port vlan 1 10 Global GVRP Disabled Ingress Checking Acceptable Frame Type Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Frames Disabled Enabled Frames 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 PRPRPRPPPPPP 0 Total Entries create dot1v_protocol_group Purpose Create a protocol group for protocol VLAN function Syntax create dot1v_protocol_group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt Description This command is used to create a protocol group for protocol VLAN function Parameters group _id The id of a protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 characters Restrictions On
112. 1024 gt Adds an additional rule to the above specified access profile The value is used to index the rule created For information on number of rules that can be created for a given port lease see the introduction to this chapter ethernet Specifies that the Switch will look only into the layer 2 part of each packet vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only to this VLAN source_mac lt macaddr gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only packets with this source MAC address destination_mac lt macadar gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only packets with this destination MAC address 802 1p lt value 0 7 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802 1p priority value ethernet_type lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets with this hexadecimal 802 1Q Ethernet type value in the packet header 403 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config access_profile Parameters ip v4 Specifies that the Switch will look into the IP fields in each packet vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only this VLAN source_ip lt ipaddr gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only packets with this source IP address destination_ip
113. 3 Enable Disable 260 Used to display the currently configured router ports on the Switch show router_ports vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all static dynamic This command will display the router ports currently configured on the Switch lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the router port resides lt vid_list gt The VIDs of the VLAN on which the router port resides all All the IGMP router ports will be displayed static Displays router ports that have been statically configured dynamic Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured forbidden Displays router ports that are forbidden Restrictions None 166 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the router ports DAS 3626 admin show router ports all Command show router ports all VLAN Name default Static router port Dynamic router port Router IP Forbidden router port VLAN Name Static router port Dynamic router port Router IP Forbidden router port VLAN Name Static router port Dynamic router port Router IP Forbidden router port Total Entries 3 DAS 3626 admin show igmp_snooping group Purpose Used to display the current IGMP snooping configuration on the Switch Syntax show igmp_snooping group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt lt ipaddr gt data_drive
114. 3 Port y Access Deny Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses 234 1 1 1 238 244 244 244 Port 3 Access Deny Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses DAS 3626 admin config max_mcast_group ports Purpose This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join Syntax config max_mcast_group ipv4 ipv6 ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list max_group lt value 1 1024 gt infinite Description This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join Parameters lt portlist gt A range of ports to config the max_mcast_group lt vianid_list gt A range of VLAN IDs to config the max_mcast_group max_group Specifies the maximum number of the multicast groups The range is from 7 to 1024 or infinite Infinite is the default setting Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the maximum number of multicast groups DAS 3626 admini config max_mcast_group ipv4 ports 1 3 max_group 100 Command config max_mcast_ group ipv4 ports 1 3 max_group 100 Success DAS 3626 admin 59 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show max_mcast_group ports Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage This command display the max number of multicast groups that a port can join show max_mcast_group ipv4 ipv6 ports
115. 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt macaddr gt The MAC address that is present in the forwarding database table None 250 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display multicast MAC address table 251 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show multicast fdb vlan default Command show multicast _fdb vlan default VLAN Name default MAC Address 01 00 00 00 00 01 Egress Ports gt 1 5 Mode Static Total Entries 1 DAS 3626 admin show fdb Purpose Used to display the current unicast MAC address forwarding database Syntax show fdb port lt port gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt mac_address lt macaddr gt static aging_time Description This command will display the current contents of the Switch s forwarding database Parameters port lt port gt The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address The Switch will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt macaddr gt The MAC address that is present in the forwarding database table static Displays the static MAC address entries aging_time Displays the aging time for the MAC address forwarding database Restrictions None Example usage To display unicast MAC address table DAS 3626 admin
116. 4 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 35 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual download Purpose Used to download and install new firmware or a Switch configuration file from a TFTP server Syntax download firmware_fromTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt lt path_filename 64 gt image_id lt int 1 2 gt cfg_fromTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt lt path_filename 64 gt Description This command is used to download a new firmware or a Switch configuration file from a TFTP server Parameters firmware_fromTFTP Download and install new firmware on the Switch from a TFTP server cfg_fromTFTP Download a switch configuration file from a TFTP server lt jpaddr gt The IP address of the TFTP server lt ipv6addr gt The IPv6 address of the TFTP server lt path_filename gt The DOS path and filename of the firmware or switch configuration file on the TFTP server For example C 3700 had image_id lt int 1 2 gt Specify the working section ID The Switch can hold two firmware versions for the user to select from which are specified by section ID increment Allows the download of a partial switch configuration file This allows a file to be downloaded that will change only the switch parameters explicitly stated in the configuration file All other switch parameters will remain
117. 5 gt key lt key_string 254 gt none timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt int 1 255 gt config authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius port lt int 1 65535 gt key lt key_string 254 gt none timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt int 1 255 gt delete authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs Ce nM xtacacs tacacs radius show authen server_host show authen server_host server_host config authen parameter lt int lt SS 255 gt response_timeout config authen parameter lt int 1 255 gt attempt show authen parameter authen show authen parameter 329 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters 330 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Each command is listed in detail in the following sections DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable authen_policy Purpose Used to enable system access authentication policy Syntax enable authen_policy Description This command will enable an administrator defined authentication policy for users trying to access the Switch When enabled the device will check the method list and choose a technique for user authentication upon login Parameters None 332 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable authen_policy Restrictions Only Admini
118. 600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual To delete a multicast FDB entry DAS 3626 admin delete fdb default 01 00 00 00 01 02 Command delete Success DAS 3626 admin clear fdb Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage fdb default 01 00 00 00 01 02 Used to clear the Switch s forwarding database of all dynamically learned MAC addresses clear fdb vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt port lt port gt all This command is used to clear dynamically learned entries to the Switch s forwarding database lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides port lt port gt The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address The Switch will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port all Clears all dynamic entries to the Switch s forwarding database Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To clear all FDB dynamic entries DAS 3626 admin clear fdb all Command clear fdb all Success DAS 3626 admin show multicast_fdb Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to display the contents of the Switch s multicast forwarding database show multicast_fdb vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt mac_address lt macaddr gt This command is used to display the current contents of the Switch s multicast MAC address forwarding database lt vian_name
119. 7 gt lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt With this advanced unique Packet Content Mask also known as Packet Content Access Control List ACL D Link switches can effectively mitigate some network attacks like the common ARP Spoofing attack that is wide spread today This is the reason why Packet Content ACL is able to inspect any specified content of a packet in different protocol layers IPV6 Denotes that IPv6 packets will be examined by the Switch for forwarding or filtering based on the rules configured in the config access_profile command for IPv6 e class Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service ToS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 flowlabel Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets tcp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Transmission Control Protocol TCP field udp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s User Datagram Protocol UDP field source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the source IPv6 address destination_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the destination IPv6 address Restrictio
120. 72 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 Note For unicast storm traffic Broadcast Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled DAS 3626 admin Trap None Multicast Unicast Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Time Interval oununuwnwnuwnoauwnun on uw the violated action is always drop DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config traffic trap Purpose Used to configure the trap settings for the packet storm control mechanism Syntax config traffic trap none storm_occurred storm_cleared both Description This command will configure how packet storm control trap messages will be used when a packet storm is detected by the Switch This function can only be used for the software traffic storm control mechanism when the action field in the config traffic storm_control command is set as shutdown Parameters none No notification will be generated or sent when a packet storm control is detected by the Switch storm _occurred A notification will be generated and sent when a packet storm has been detected by the Sw
121. AN on which the forbidden router port resides add delete Specifies whether to add or delete forbidden router ports of the specified VLAN lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports that will be configured as forbidden router ports Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage 163 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual To set up forbidden router ports DAS 3626 admin config router _ports forbidden vlan default add 2 10 Command config router ports forbidden vlan default add 2 10 Success DAS 3626 admin enable igmp_snooping Purpose Used to enable IGMP snooping on the Switch Syntax enable igmp_snooping Description This command allows users to enable IGMP snooping on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable IGMP snooping on the Switch DAS 3626 admin enable igmp_snooping Command enable igmp_snooping Success DAS 3626 admin disable igmp_snooping Purpose Used to enable IGMP snooping on the Switch Syntax disable igmp_snooping Description This command disables IGMP snooping on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable IGMP snooping on the Switch DAS 3626 admin disable igmp_snooping Command disable igmp_snooping
122. AS 3626 admin config authen application Purpose Used to configure various applications on the Switch for authentication using a previously 372 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config authen application configured method list Syntax config authen application console telnet ssh http all login enable default method_list_name lt string 15 gt Description This command is used to configure Switch configuration applications console telnet ssh web for login at the user level and at the administration level authen_enable utilizing a previously configured method list Parameters application Choose the application to configure The user may choose one of the following five options to configure e console Choose this parameter to configure the command line interface login method telnet Choose this parameter to configure the telnet login method ssh Choose this parameter to configure the Secure Shell login method http Choose this parameter to configure the web interface login method all Choose this parameter to configure all applications console telnet ssh web login method login Use this parameter to configure an application for normal login on the user level using a previously configured method list enable Use this parameter to configure an application for upgrading a normal user level to administrator privileges using a previously c
123. AS 3626 admin delete iproute default Command delete iproute default Success DAS 3626 admin 48 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show iproute Purpose Used to display the Switch s current IP routing table Syntax show iproute Description This command will display the Switch s current IP routing table Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the contents of the IP routing table DAS 3626 admin tshow iproute Command show iproute Routing Table IP Address Netmask Gateway Interface Cost Protocol 10 1 1 254 System Default 10 48 74 122 System Local Total Entries 2 DAS 3626 admin 49 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual IPv6 NeicHBor Discovery ComMANDS The following commands are used to detect IPv6 neighbors on the switch and to keep a running database about these neighbor devices The IPv6 Neighbor Detection commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt lt ipv6addr gt lt macaddr gt delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt all lt ipv6addr gt static dynamic all show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt all ipv6 address lt ipv6addr gt static dynamic all config ipv6 nd ns ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt retrans_time lt ui
124. BO Upstream Power Back Off disable disable UPBO g 993 2 enable UPBO follow g 993 2 J custom Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl UPBOr DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default UPBO g 993 2 Command config vdsl profile name default UPBO g 993 2 Success DAS 3626 admin 425 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile DPBO Purpose Used to config vdsl profile DPBO Syntax config vdsl profile name lt profile_id 1 60 gt lt profile_name 32 gt DPBO disable enable Description This command is used to rename VDSL DPBO Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed DPBO config DPBO Downstream Power Back Off disable disable DPBO enable enable DPBO Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl DPBO DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default DPBO disable Command config vdsl profile name default DPBO disable Success DAS 3626 admin 426 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile DPBOValues Purpose Used to config vdsl profile DPBO value Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt DPBOValues DPBOESEL lt int 0 511 gt DPBOESCMA
125. CFM ports DAS 3626 admin config cfm ports 2 5 state enable Command config cfm ports 2 5 state enable Success DAS 3626 admin show cfm ports Purpose This command is used to show cfm state of specified ports Syntax show cfm ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display CFM state of speicified ports Parameters ports Specifies the logical port list Restrictions None 263 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display CFM ports DAS 3626 admin show cfm ports 3 6 Command show cfm ports 3 6 State Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled DAS 3626 admin show cfm Purpose This command is used to show CFM information Syntax show cfm md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt mepname lt string 32 gt Description This command is used to show CFM information Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance domain name mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID mepname Specifies the MEP name Restrictions None Example usage To display CFM DAS 3626 admin show cfm Command show cfm CFM State Enabled Level MD Name op_domain DAS 3626 admin 264 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display CFM md DAS 3626 admini show cfm md op domain Command show cfm md op domain MD Level 2 MIP C
126. CLI Reference Manual VLAN Counter Commanps The VLAN counter commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create vian_counter vlan lt vlan_name gt vianid lt vidlist gt delete vlan_counter all vlan lt vlan_name gt vlanid lt vidlist gt clear vlan_counter statistics show vlan_counter vlan lt vlan_name gt show vlan_counter statistics vlan lt vlan_name gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create vian_counter Purpose This command creates the control entry for VLAN traffic flow statistics Syntax create vian_counter vlan lt vlan_name gt vianid lt vidlist gt Description This command is used to create control entries to count statistics for specific VLANs or to count statistics for specific ports on specific VLANs The statistics can be either byte count or packet count The statistics can be counted for different frame types Parameters vian_name Specifies the VLAN name vidlist Specifies a list of VLANs by VLAN ID Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To begin counting packet levels for broadcast packets on VLAN 1 DAS 3626 admin create vlan_counter vlanid 25 Command create vlan_counter vlanid 25 Success DAS 3626 admin 273 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI
127. CS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server hosts into user defined categories for authentication using method lists The user may add up to eight authentication server hosts to this group using the config authen server_group command Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the newly created server group Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create the server group group_1 DAS 3626 admini create authen server group group 1 Command create authen server group group_1 Success DAS 3626 admin 378 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to configure a user defined authentication server group Syntax config authen server_group tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius lt string 15 gt add delete server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius Description This command will configure an authentication server group A server group is a technique used to group TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server hosts into user defined categories for authentication using method lists The user may define the type of server group by protocol or by previously defined server group Up to eight authentication server hosts may be added to any particular group Parameters server_group The user may define the group by protocol groups built into the Switch TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS
128. Code 0 Emergency system is unusable 1 Alert action must be taken immediately 2 Critical critical conditions 3 Error error conditions 4 Warning warning conditions 5 Notice normal but significant condition 6 Informational informational messages 7 Debug debug level messages Numerical Facility Code 457 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create syslog host kernel messages user level messages mail system system daemons security authorization messages messages generated internally by syslog line printer subsystem network news subsystem UUCP subsystem clock daemon security authorization messages FTP daemon NTP subsystem log audit log alert clock daemon local use 0 local0 local use 1 local local use 2 local2 local use 3 local3 local use 4 local4 local use 5 local5 local use 6 local6 local use 7 local7 OONDOARWN O local0 Specifies that local use 0 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 16 from the list above local1 Specifies that local use 1 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 17 from the list above local2 Specifies that local use 2 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 18 from the list above local3 Specifies that local use 3 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 19 from the list above local4 Spe
129. Command delete mld_snooping multicast _vlan_group_profile profile name g1 Success DAS 3626 admin show mlid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to view an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Syntax show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt Description This command displays an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the MLD multicast VLAN profile name max length is 32 If not specified all MLD multicast VLAN group profiles will be displayed Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 186 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the MLD multicast VLAN group profile DAS 3626 admini show mld_snooping multicast vlan group profile Command show mld_ snooping multicast _vlan_group profile Profile Name Multicast Addresses FF12 1 FF12 2 Total Entry 1 DAS 3626 admin config mid_snooping multicast_vlan multicast_group Purpose Used to configure the multicast group which will be learned with the specific MLD multicast VLAN Syntax config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete profile_name lt profile_name 1 32 gt Description When a MLD packet is received first it will be checked whether to be processed by MLD snooping If MLD snooping for the classified VLAN of this MLD pac
130. D Link Building Networks for People CLI Reference Manual Product Model DAS 3636 VDSL2 Switch Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of D Link Corporation is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text D Link and the D LINK logo are trademarks of D Link Corporation Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products D Link Corporation disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own July 2009 P N 651370012005G Table of Contents INTRODUCTION biavesseveiensatereccinetecdecacavaat vapisnenteseredsasatetecidsntaeay a iaaa saara aaaea aip dila ae 1 USING THE CONSOLE C loos iaiticascstvwadeancsecaveanvenssanncssassestanssuntaecavecavencateccsusaeadssbouadsutiaesasiicasnans 3 COMMAND SYNTAX eer i aeie iarrann at onlenienndetbvaiauned caine sea ious aE taa aiaa Eiaha ESA Oana aana TaESA 6 BASIC SWITCH COMMANDS nnnnssssnnsenunnnnenunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 8 MODIFY BANNER AND PROMPT COMMANDS ss sssssennnnsenunnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne nne 28 SWITCH UTILITY COMMANDS s sansssunnnennunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
131. Enabled Description Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Description Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Description Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Description Enabled Auto Disabled VDSL None Enabled Description Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Description DAS 3626 admin a NOTE Connection status displays the following status Link Down fe Speed Duplex FlowCtrl link up or Err Disabled Example usage To display disabled ports including connection status and reason for being disabled on a standalone switch admin show ports err disabled show ports err disabled Port Connection Status Reason admin Purpose Used to enable the jumbo frame function on the Switch Syntax enable jumbo_frame Description This command will allow ethernet frames larger than 1536 bytes to be processed by the Switch The maximum size of the jumbo frame may not exceed 10240 Bytes tagged Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the jumbo frame 64 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini enable jumbo frame Command enable jumbo frame The maximum size of jumbo frame is 10240 bytes Success DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to disable the jumbo frame function on the Switch Syntax disable jumbo_frame Description This command will disable the jumbo frame function on the Sw
132. HE DSS WITH 3DES EDE CBC_SHA Enabled RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5 Enabled DAS 3626 admin show ssl certificate Purpose Used to view the SSL certificate file status on the Switch Syntax show ssl certificate Description This command is used to view the SSL certificate file information currently implemented on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view certificate file information on the Switch DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show ssl certificate Command show ssl certificate Loaded with RSA Certificate DAS 3626 admin download ssl certificate Purpose Used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch Syntax download ssl certificate lt ipaddr gt certfilename lt path_filename 64 gt keyfilename lt path_filename 64 gt Description This command is used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch from a TFTP server The certificate file is a data record used for authenticating devices on the network It contains information on the owner keys for authentication and digital signatures Both the server and the client must have consistent certificate files for optimal use of the SSL function The Switch only supports certificate files with der file extensions Parameters lt ipaddr gt Enter the IP address of the TFTP server certfilename lt path_filename 64 gt Enter the path and the f
133. L Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin tshow port dotlv ports 1 2 Command show port dotlv ports 1 2 Port 1 Protocol Group ID Protocol Priority default vlan 2 vlan_3 vian 4 Protocol Priority Total Entries 2 DAS 3626 admin enable pvid auto_assign Purpose Enable disable auto assignment of pvid Syntax enable disable pvid auto_assign Description The command enables the auto assign of PVID If auto assign PVID is disabled PVID only be changed by PVID configuration user changes explicitly The VLAN configuration will not automatically change PVID If Auto assign PVID is enabled PVID will be possibly changed by PVID or VLAN configuration When user configures a port to VLAN X s untagged membership this port s PVID will be updated with VLAN X In the form of VLAN list command PVID is updated with last item of VLAN list When user removes a port from the untagged membership of the PVID s VLAN the port s PVID will be assigned with default VLAN The default setting is enabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the auto assign PVID DAS 3626 adminienable pvid auto assign Command enable pvid auto_assign Success DAS 3626 admin 147 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show pvid auto_assign Purpose Show PVID auto assigment state Syntax sho
134. LI Reference Manual show mld_snooping rate_limit Syntax show mld_snooping rate_limit ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt Description This command shows the rate of MLD control packets that are allowed per port or VLAN Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports that will be displayed lt vianid_list gt Specifies a VLAN or range of VLANs that will be displayed Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To show rate limitation DAS 3626 admini show mld snooping rate limit ports 1 Command show mld_snooping rate limit ports 1 No Limitation Total Entries 1 DAS 3626 admin config mid_snooping rate_limit Purpose Used to show MLD snooping rate limitation Syntax config mld_snooping rate_limit ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt value 1 1000 gt no_limit Description This command configures the rate of MLD control packets that are allowed per port or VLAN Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports that will be configured lt vianid_list gt Specifies a VLAN or range of VLANs that will be configured lt value 1 1000 gt Specifies the rate of MLD control packets that the switch can process ona specific port The rate is specified in packets per second The packet that exceeds the limited rate will be dropped The default setting is no_limit no_limit Allows user to
135. N commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create mld_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt lt vianid 2 4094 gt config mld_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete member_port lt portlist gt tag_member_port lt portlist gt source_port lt portlist gt state enable disable replace_source_ip lt ipv6addr gt create mld_snooping lt profile_name 1 32 gt multicast_vlan_group_profile config mld_snooping lt profile_name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcastv6_address_list gt multicast_vlan_group_ profile delete mld_snooping profile_name lt profile_name 1 32 gt all multicast_vlan_group_profile show mld_snooping lt profile_name 1 32 gt multicast_vlan_group_profile config mld_snooping lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete profile_name lt profile_name 1 32 gt multicast_vlan_group show mld_snooping lt vlan_name 32 gt multicast_vlan_group show mld_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt config mld_snooping multicast_vian disable enable forward_unmatched Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 183 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create mld_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to create an MLD multicast VLAN Syntax create mld_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt lt vlanid 2 4094 gt Description T
136. OS filter will create one access profile and three access rules per port UDP port number 137 and 138 and TCP port 139 Example usage To configure the NetBIOS state DAS 3626 admin config filter netbios 1 10 state enable Command config filter netbios 1 10 state enable Success DAS 3626 admin show filter netbios Purpose Used to display the switch settings to filter NetBIOS packets from specified ports Syntax show filter netbios Description This command will display the switch settings to filter NetBIOS packets from the specified ports Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 394 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the extensive NetBIOS filter status DAS 3626 admin show filter netbios Command show filter netbios Enabled Ports 1 3 DAS 3626 admin config filter extensive_netbios Purpose Used to configure the switch to filter 802 3 frame NetBIOS packets from specified ports Syntax config filter extensive_netbios lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command will configure the switch to filter 802 3 frame NetBIOS packets from the specified ports Parameters lt portlist gt all The list of port numbers to which the NetBIOS filter will be applied state enable disable Used to enable disable the NetBIOS filter on the switch Restrictions Only Administrator leve
137. RP table DAS 3626 admin show arpentry Command show arpentry ARP Aging Time 20 Interface IP Address MAC Address FF FF FF FF FF FF Local Broadcast 10 24 73 21 00 01 02 03 04 00 Local 10 48 74 121 00 50 BA 00 07 36 Static 100 255 255 255 FF FF FF FF FF FF Local Broadcast Total Entries 4 DAS 3626 admin clear arptable Purpose Used to remove all dynamic ARP table entries Syntax clear arptable Description This command is used to remove dynamic ARP table entries from the Switch s ARP table Static ARP table entries are not affected Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To remove dynamic entries in the ARP table DAS 3626 admin clear arptable Command clear arptable Success DAS 3626 admin 77 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DHCP Re tay The DHCP relay commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Parameters hops lt value 1 16 gt time lt sec 0 65535 gt enable sabi enable disable replace drop I keep C OSOSOOSOSOSOSCSC aisable chop_relay S Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 78 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp_relay Purpose Used to configure the DHCP BOOTP relay feature of the switch Syntax config dhcp_rel
138. S 3626 admin 206 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Loop Back DETECTION COMMANDS The Loop back Detection commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config loopdetect recover_timer value 0 lt value 60 1000000 gt interval lt 1 32767 gt config loopdetect ports lt portlist gt all state enabled disabled enable loopdetect disable loopdetect show loopdetect show loopdetect ports all lt portlist gt config loopdetect trap none loop_detected loop_cleared both Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config loopdetect Purpose Used to configure loop back detection on the switch Syntax config loopdetect recover_timer value 0 lt value 60 1000000 gt interval lt 1 32767 gt Description This command is used to configure loop back detection on the switch Parameters recover_timer The time interval in seconds used by the Auto Recovery mechanism to decide how long to check if the loop status is gone The valid range is 60 to 1000000 Zero is a special value which means to disable the auto recovery mechanism The default value is 60 interval The time interval inseconds at which the remote device transmits all the CTP packets to detect the loop back event The default value is 10 with a valid range of 1 to 32767 Restricti
139. SL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile Vdsl2Profile Purpose Used to config vdsl profile Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt Vdsl2Profile 8a 8b 8c 8d 12a 12b 17a 30al autoprofile autoprofile1 Description This command is used to config VDSL profile parameter Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed Vdsl2Profile G993 2 VDSL profile such as 8a 8b 8c 12a 12b 17a 30a and autoprofile Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config g993 2 vdsl profile parameter DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default Vdsl2Profile autoprofile Command config vdsl profile name default Vdsl2Profile autoprofile Success DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile UPBO Purpose Used to config vdsl profile UPBO Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt UPBO disable g 993 2 custom lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt lt k_value gt Description This command is used to rename VDSL UPBO Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed UPBO config UP
140. STI even it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a Port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected This parameter should be false by default If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influencing the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator restricted_tcn true false f true causes the Port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other Ports This parameter should be false by default If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning trees active topology as a result of persistent incorrectly learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or MAC_Operational for the attached LANs transitions frequently p2p true false auto true indicates a point to point P2P shared link P2P ports are similar to edge ports however they are restricted in that a P2P port must operate in full duplex Like edge ports P2P ports transition to a forwarding state rapidly thus benefiting from RSTP A p2p value of false indicates that the port cannot have p2p
141. Switch CLI Reference Manual show error ports Restrictions None 447 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the errors of the port 3 448 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show error ports 3 Command show error ports 3 Port Number TX Frames CRC Error Excessive Deferral Undersize CRC Error Oversize Late Collision Fragment Excessive Collision Jabber Single Collision Drop Pkts Collision Symbol Error DAS 3626 admin show utilization Purpose Used to display real time port and CPU utilization statistics Syntax show utilization cpu ports lt portlist gt Description This command will display the real time port and CPU utilization statistics for the Switch Parameters cpu Entering this parameter will display the current cpu utilization of the Switch ports Entering this parameter will display the current port utilization of the Switch e lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the port utilization statistics DAS 3626 admin show utilization ports Command show utilization ports TX sec RX sec Util oo ooorOoOoOoro oOo 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 DAS 3626 admin To display the current CPU utilization 449 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show uti
142. Syntax config 802 1p user_priority lt priority 0 7 gt lt class_id 0 7 gt Description This command allows users to configure the way the Switch will map an incoming packet based on its 802 1p user priority to one of the eight available hardware priority queues on the Switch The Switch s default is to map the following incoming 802 1p user priority values to the eight hardware priority queues 802 1p Hardware Queue Remark 2 Mid low Lowest Lowest Mid low Mid high Mid high Mid high 7 Highest This mapping scheme is based upon recommendations contained in IEEE 802 1D Change this mapping by specifying the 802 1p user priority users want to map to the lt class_id 0 7 gt the number of the hardware queue Parameters lt priority 0 7 gt The 802 1p user priority you want to associate with the lt class_id 0 7 gt the number of the hardware queue with lt class_id 0 7 gt The number of the Switch s hardware priority queue The Switch has eight hardware priority queues available They are numbered between 0 the lowest priority and 7 the highest priority Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure 802 1p user priority on the Switch 280 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin config 802 1p user priority 1 3 Command config 802 1p user priority 1 3 Success DAS 3626 admin show 802 1p user_
143. Syntax show stp Description This command displays the Switch s current STP configuration Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the status of STP on the Switch Status 1 STP enabled with STP compatible version DAS 3626 admin tshow stp Command show stp STP Bridge Global Settings STP Status Enabled STP Version STP compatible Max Age 18 Hello Time 12 Forward Delay 15 Max Hops 15 TX Hold Count 6 Forwarding BPDU Disabled NNI BPDU Address dotld DAS 3626 admin Status 2 STP enabled for RSTP DAS 3626 admin tshow stp Command show stp STP Bridge Global Settings STP Status Enabled STP Version RSTP Max Age 20 Hello Time S42 Forward Delay 242 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Max Hops 20 TX Hold Count 6 Forwarding BPDU Disabled NNI BPDU Address dotld DAS 3626 admin 243 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Status 3 STP enabled for MSTP DAS 3626 admin tshow stp Command show stp STP Bridge Global Settings STP Status Enabled STP Version MSTP Max Age 18 Forward Delay 15 Max Hops 15 TX Hold Count 6 Forwarding BPDU Disabled NNI BPDU Address dotld DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to display the Switch s current STP ports configuration Syntax show stp ports lt portlist gt Description This command displays the STP ports settings for a
144. This command will display authentication server groups currently configured on the Switch This command will display the following fields Group Name The name of the server group currently configured on the Switch including built in groups and user defined groups IP Address The IP address of the server host Protocol The authentication protocol used by the server host Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the previously created server group to be viewed Entering this command without the lt string gt parameter will display all authentication server groups on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 380 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To view authentication server groups currently set on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show authen server group Command show authen server group Server Group mix_l Group Name IP Address Protocol TACACS TACACS radius abrt RADIUS tacacs m a TACACS tacacs pe Eines TACACS xtacacs pe rae Be XTACACS Total Entries DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to configure the amount of time the Switch will wait for a user to enter authentication before timing out Syntax config authen parameter response_timeout lt int 0 255 gt Description This command will set the time the Switch will wait for a response of authentication from the user Parame
145. UDP port numbers 137 and 138 and TCP port number 139 For Extensive NetBIOS Filter when it is enabled all NetBIOS packets over 802 3 frames will be filtered from the specified port This command is used to configure the state of the NetBIOS filter Enabling the Extensive NetBIOS filter will create one access profile and create one access rule per port DSAP Destination Service Access Point F0 and SASP Source Service Access Point FO The DHCP Server NetBIOS Filter commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config filter dhcp_ server add permit server_ip lt ipaddr gt client_mac lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all delete permit server_ip lt ipaddr gt client_mac lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable E onmens SSCS Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 392 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config filter dhcp_server Purpose DHCP server packets except those that have been IP client MAC bound will be filtered This command is used to configure the state of the function for filtering of DHCP server packet and to add delete the DHCP server client binding entry Syntax config filter dhcp_server add permit server_ip lt ipaddr gt client_mac lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all delete per
146. Up state disable enable downshiftSnr lt int 0 310 gt upshiftSnr lt int 0 310 gt downshiftDuration lt int 0 16383 gt upshiftDuration lt int 0 16383 gt Description This command is used to config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream SRA Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed SRADn SRAUp To config VDSL profile Downstream Upstream SRA state disable enable enable disable Downstream Upstream SRA downshifiSnr lt int 0 310 gt Downstream Upstream down shift noise margin The range is 0 310 in unit of 0 1 dB upshiftSnr lt int 0 310 gt Downstream Upstream up shift noise margin The range is 0 310 in unit of 0 1 dB downshiftDuration lt int 0 16383 gt Downstream Upstream down shift minimum time interval The range is 0 16383 in unit of 1sec upshiftDuration lt int 0 16383 gt Downstream Upstream up shift minimum time interval The range is 0 16383 in unit of 1sec Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile vdsl profile Downstream Upstream SRA DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default SRADn state enable Command config vdsl profile name default SRADn state enable Success DAS 3626 admin 437 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile robustEocRateDn robustEocRateUp Purp
147. YourService Success AtYourService admin5 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Other restrictions include e If the reset command is executed the modified banner will remain modified However the reset config reset system command will reset the modified banner to the original factory banner The capacity of the banner is 6 80 6 Lines and 80 characters per line Ctrl W will only save the modified banner in the DRAM Users need to type the save command to save it into FLASH Only valid in threshold level Example usage To modify the banner DAS 3626 admini config greeting _message Command config greeting message Greeting Messages Editor DAS 3626 VDSL2 Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 1 00 B042 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved lt Function Key gt lt Control Key gt Ctrl C Quit without save left right Ctrl W Save and quit up down Move cursor Ctrl D Delete line Ctr1 x Erase all setting Ctr1 L Reload original setting 30 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show greeting_message Purpose Used to view the currently configured greeting message configured on the Switch Syntax show greeting message Description This command is used to view the currently configured greeting message on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view the cu
148. _ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt tcp src_port_mask lt hex O0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt udp src_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt J 1 delete access _ profile profile_id lt value 1 1024 gt all profile_name lt name 1 32 gt 396 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters config access_profile config access_profile profile_id lt value 1 1024 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt add access_id auto_assign lt value 1 1024 gt ethernet vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt mask lt hex 0x0 OxOfff gt source_mac lt macaddr gt mask lt macmask gt destination_mac lt macaddr gt mask lt macmask gt 802 1p lt value 0 7 gt ethernet_type lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 1 ipv4 vian lt vlan_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt mask lt hex 0x0 OxOfff gt source_ip lt ipaddr gt mask lt netmask gt destination_ip lt ipaddr gt mask lt netmask gt dscp lt value 0 63 gt icmp type lt value 0 255 gt code lt value 0 255 gt igmp type lt value 0 255 gt tcp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt urg ack psh rst syn fin udp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt user_
149. a comma to separate specific days For example mon fri Monday to Friday sun mon fri Sunday Monday and Friday delete Deletes a time range profile When a time_range profile has been associated with ACL entries the delete of this time_range profile will fail Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config time range admin tconfig time_range 1 3 new hours start_time 11 21 20 end time 11 44 40 mon fri config time_range 1 3 new hours start_time 11 21 20 end_time 11 44 40 mon fri admin show time_range Purpose Used to display current access list table Syntax show time_range Description This command is used to display current time range setting Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the time range on the Switch 407 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini show time_range Command show time_range Time Range Information Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Start Time 11 21 20 End Time 11 44 40 Total Entries 1 DAS 3626 admin show current_config access profile Purpose This command displays the ACL part of current configuration Syntax show current_config access_profile Description This command displays the ACL privilege of the current configuration in user level of privilege The overall current configuration can be displayed by show config command which is accessible
150. a three layered encryption code for secure communication between the server and the host The user may implement any one or combination of the ciphersuites available yet different ciphersuites will affect the security level and the performance of the secured connection The information included in the ciphersuites is not included with the Switch and requires downloading from a third source in a file form called a certificate This function of the Switch cannot be executed without the presence and implementation of the certificate file and can be downloaded to the Switch by utilizing a TFTP server The Switch supports SSLv3 and TLSv1 Other versions of SSL may not be compatible with this Switch and may cause problems upon authentication and transfer of messages from client to host Command Parameters enable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128_ MD5 RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 config ssl cachetimeout lt value 60 86400 gt show ss download ssl certificate lt ipaddr gt certfilename lt path_filename 64 gt keyfilename lt path_filename 64 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 297 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable ssl Purpose To enable the SSL function on the Swi
151. able fast_done enable disable report_suppression enable disable Description This command is used to configure MLD snooping on the switch If the MLD version is configured with a lower version the higher version s MLD Report Leave messages will be ignored Parameters vlan_name The name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured vidlist The VIDs of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured all Specifies that all VLANs configured on the switch will be configured state Allows the user to enable or disable the MLD snooping function for the chosed VLAN fast_done enable or disable MLD snooping fast_done function If enable the membership is immediately removed when the system receive the MLD done message report suppression Enables or Disables MLD snooping report suppression function If enabled multiple MLD reports are done for a specific S G and will be intregrated into one report only before sending to the router port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the MLD snooping to the default vlan with noted_timeout 250 sec and state enable DAS 3626 admini config mld_snooping vlan default state enable Command config mld_ snooping vlan default state enable Success DAS 3626 admin 192 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config mild_snooping querier Purpose Used t
152. able loop back detection on the switch DAS 3626 admin tenable loopdetect Command enable loopdetect Success DAS 3626 admin disable loopdetect Purpose Used to globally disable loop back detection on the switch Syntax disable loopdetect Description This command is used to globally disable loop back detection on the switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 208 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To disable loop back detection on the switch DAS 3626 admin tdisable loopdetect Command disable loopdetect Success DAS 3626 admin show loopdetect Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the current loop back detection settings on the switch show loopdetect This command is used to display the current loop back detection settings on the switch None None To show loop detect DAS 3626 admin tshow loopdetect Command show loopdetect Global Settings Mode Interval Disabled Port_based 10 Recover Time 60 Trap Status DAS 3626 admin None show loopdetect ports Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to display the current per port loop back detection settings on the switch show loopdetect ports all lt portlist gt This command is used to display the current per port loop ba
153. admin This is the command line where all commands are input DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Setting the Switch s IP Address Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP IP application for example BOOTP TFTP The Switch s default IP address is 10 90 90 90 Users can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory This MAC address cannot be changed and can be found on the initial boot console screen shown below boot Procedure v1 03 B016 Power On Self Test accsisiscewcie Sel edad eee wisi ete ess BLS ed ass Galera ees 100 MAC Address 00 26 54 60 54 60 H W Version Please Wait Loading V1 02 B018 Runtime Image 1 100 R2R3R4R5R6 BME 1 POST Success BME 2 POST Success BME 3 POST Success BME 1 Download Downloaded successfully BME 2 Download Downloaded successfully BME 3 Download Downloaded successfully VDSL driver version 5 3 0 13IK005010 The Switch s MAC address can also be found in the Web management program on the Switch Information Basic Settings window on the Configuration menu The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web based manager The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols in which case the a
154. age To enable the SSH authentication mode by password 319 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin config ssh authmode password enable Command config ssh authmode password enable Success DAS 3626 admin 320 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show ssh authmode Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the SSH authentication mode settings show ssh authmode This command is used to display the current SSH authentication set on the Switch None None To view the current authentication mode set on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show ssh authmode Command show ssh authmode The SSH Authmode Password Enabled Publickey Enabled Hostbased Enabled DAS 3626 admin config ssh server Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Usage example Used to configure the SSH server config ssh server maxsession lt int 1 8 gt contimeout lt sec 120 600 gt authfail lt int 2 20 gt rekey 10min 30min 60min never This command is used to configure the SSH server maxsession lt int 1 8 gt Allows the user to set the number of users that may simultaneously access the Switch The default setting is 8 contimeout lt sec 120 600 gt Allows the user to set the connection timeout The user may set a time between 120 and 600 seconds The def
155. al Mode CPU Utilization Information Rising Threshold 30 Falling Threshold 20 Enabled Strict DAS 3626 admin 292 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Port Security COMMANDS The Switch s port security commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config port_security ports lt portlist gt all admin_state enable disable max_learning_addr lt max_lock_no 0 512 gt lock_address_mode Permanent Deleteontimeout Deleteonreset delete port_security_entry vlan name lt vlan_name 32 gt mac_address lt macaddr gt port lt port gt clear port_security_entry port lt portlist gt show port_security port lt portlist gt enable port_security trap_log Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config port_security ports Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure port security settings config port_security ports lt portlist gt all admin_state enable disable max_learning_addr lt max_lock_no 0 512 gt lock_address_mode Permanent Deleteontimeout Deleteonreset This command allows for the configuration of the port security feature Only the ports listed in the lt portlist gt are affected portlist Specifies a port or range of ports to be c
156. al mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified concisely For example specify to begin DST on April 3 and end DST on October 14 s_week Configure the week of the month in which DST begins e lt start_week 1 4 last gt The number of the week during the month in which DST begins where 1 is the first week 2 is the second week and so on last is the last week of the month e_week Configure the week of the month in which DST ends Parameters lt end_week 1 4 last gt The number of the week during the month in which DST ends where 1 is the first week 2 is the second week and so on last is the last week of the month s_day Configure the day of the week in which DST begins e lt start_day sun sat gt The day of the week in which DST begins expressed using a three character abbreviation sun mon tue wed thu fri sat e_day Configure the day of the week in which DST ends e lt end_day sun sat gt The day of the week in which DST ends expressed using a three character abbreviation sun mon tue wed thu fri sat s_mth Configure the month in which DST begins lt start_mth 1 12 gt The month to begin DST expressed as a number e_mth Configure the month in which DST ends lt end_mth 1 12 gt The month to end DST expressed as a number s_time Configure the time of day to begin DST lt start_time hh mm gt Time is expressed using a 24 hour
157. along with the appropriate parameters in the following table 328 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters show authen leaanaa create authen_login lt string l method_list_name config authen_login default method_list_name lt string 15 gt method tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius server_group lt string 15 gt local none delete authen_login lt string 15 gt method_list_name show authen_login default method_list_name lt string 15 gt all create authen_enable lt string 15 gt method_list_name config authen_enable default method_list_name lt string 15 gt method tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius server_group lt string 15 gt local_enable none delete authen_enable lt string 15 gt method_list_name show authen_enable default method_list_name lt string 15 gt all config authen application console telnet ssh http all login enable default method_list_name lt string show authen show authen application create authen lt string pe server_group config authen tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius lt string 15 gt add delete server_host lt ipaddr gt server_group protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius delete authen lt string 15 gt server_group show authen server_group lt string 15 gt create authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius port lt int 1 6553
158. alue 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 1 port lt portlist gt all vlanbased vlan_name lt vlan_name gt vian_id lt value 1 4094 gt permit priority lt value 0 7 gt replace_priority rx_rate no_limit lt value 1 15624 gt jreplace_dscp_with lt value 0 63 gt mirror deny time_range lt range_name 32 gt delete access_id lt value 1 1024 gt This command is used to configure an access profile on the Switch and to enter specific values that will be combined using a logical AND operational method with masks entered with the create access_profile command above 402 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config access_profile Parameters profile_id lt value 1 12 gt Enter an integer used to identify the access profile that will be configured with this command This value is assigned to the access profile when it is created with the create access_profile command The profile ID sets the relative priority for the profile and specifies an index number that will identify the access profile being created with this command Priority is set relative to other profiles where the lowest profile ID has the highest priority The user may enter a profile ID number between 1 and 12 yet remember only 12 access profiles can be created on the Switch profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Specifies the name of the profile The maximum length is 32 characters add access_id lt value 1
159. ame lt name 1 32 gt fshowtmerange OOOO show current_config access _profile Access profiles allow users to establish criteria to determine whether or not the Switch will forward packets based on the information contained in each packet s header Creating an access profile is divided into two basic parts First an access profile must be created using the create access_profile command For example if users want to deny all traffic to the subnet 10 42 73 0 to 10 42 73 255 users must first create an access profile that instructs the Switch to examine all of the relevant fields of each frame First create an access profile that uses IP addresses as the criteria for examination create access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name 1 ip source_ip_mask 255 255 255 0 Here we have created an access profile that will examine the IP field of each frame received by the Switch Each source IP address the Switch finds will be combined with the source_ip_mask with a logical AND operation The profile_id parameter is used to give the access profile an identifying number in this case 1 and it is used to assign a priority in case a conflict occurs The profile_id establishes a priority within the list of profiles A lower profile_id gives the rule a higher priority In case of a conflict in the rules entered for different profiles the rule with the highest priority lowest profile_id will take precedence See below for information regarding limita
160. ame 32 gt An alphanumeric name of up to 32 characters that will identify the SNMP group the new SNMP user will be associated with Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the SNMP group named sg1 DAS 3626 admin delete snmp group sgl Command delete snmp group sgl Success DAS 3626 admin show snmp groups Purpose Used to display the group names of SNMP groups currently configured on the Switch The security model level and status of each group are also displayed Syntax show snmp groups Description This command is used to display the group names of SNMP groups currently configured on the Switch The security model level and status of each group are also displayed Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the currently configured SNMP groups on the Switch 99 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show snmp groups Command show snmp groups Vacm Access Table Settings Group Name ReadView Name WriteView Name Notify View Name Security Model Security Level Group Name ReadView Name WriteView Name Notify View Name Security Model Security Level Group Name ReadView Name WriteView Name Notify View Name Security Model Security Level Group Name ReadView Name WriteView Name Notify View Name Security Model Security Level Group Name ReadView Name WriteView Name N
161. ame device must have a different MEP name Before an MEP is created its MEPID should be configured in MA s MEPID list mep Specifies the MEP name It s unique among all MEPs configured on the device mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID It should be configured in MA s MEPID list md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name direction Specifies the MEP direction inward Specifies the inward facing up MEP outware Specifies the outward facing down MEP port Specifies the port number This port should be a member of the MA s associated VLAN Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To create a CFM MEP DAS 3626 admini create cfm mep mepl mepid 1 md op domain ma opl direction inward port 2 Command create Success DAS 3626 admin cfm mep mepl mepid 1 md op domain ma opl direction inward port 2 259 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config cfm mep Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to configure parameters of a MEP config cfm mep mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt state enable disable ccm enable disable pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt fault_alarm all mac_status remote_ccm error_ccm xcon_ccm none alarm_time lt centiseconds 250 1000 gt alarm_reset_tim
162. and MAC address Parameters Vlan_name lt vlan_name 32 gt Enter the corresponding VLAN name of the port to delete mac_address lt macaddr gt Enter the corresponding MAC address previously learned by the port to delete port lt port gt Enter the corresponding port number Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a port security entry DAS 3626 admini delete port_security entry vlan name rg mac_address 00 01 30 10 2C C7 Command delete port security entry vlan name rg mac_address 00 01 30 10 2C C7 Success DAS 3626 admin clear port_security_entry Purpose Used to clear MAC address entries learned from a specified port for the port security function Syntax clear port_security_entry ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to clear MAC address entries which were learned by the Switch by a specified port This command only relates to the port security function Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or port range to clear Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear a port security entry by port DAS 3626 admini clear port security entry port 6 Command clear port security entry port 6 Success DAS 3626 admin 294 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show port_security Purpose Syntax Description Param
163. anism the user can now use both a hardware and software mechanism the latter of which will now provide shutdown recovery and trap notification functions for the Switch lt portlist gt Used to specify a group list of ports to be configured for traffic control as defined below all Specifies all portlists are to be configured for traffic control on the Switch broadcast enable disable Enables or disables broadcast storm control multicast enable disable Enables or disables multicast storm control unicast enable disable Enables or disables unicast traffic control action Used to configure the action taken when a storm control has been detected on the Switch The user has two options drop Utilizes the hardware Traffic Control mechanism which means the Switch s hardware will determine the Packet Storm based on the Threshold value stated and drop packets until the issue is resolved shutdown Utilizes the Switch s software Traffic Control mechanism to determine the Packet Storm occurring Once detected the port will deny all incoming traffic to the port except STP BPDU packets which are essential in keeping the Spanning Tree operational on the Switch If the countdown timer has expired and yet the Packet Storm continues the port will be placed in Shutdown Forever mode and is no longer operational until the user manually resets the port using the config ports enable command Choosing this opt
164. arameters config command_history lt value 1 40 gt show command_history Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 470 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to display all commands in the Command Line Interface CLI Syntax lt command gt Description This command will display all of the commands available through the Command Line Interface CLI Parameters lt command gt Entering the question mark with an appropriate command will list all the corresponding parameters for the specified command along with a brief description of the commands function and similar commands having the same words in the command Restrictions None Example usage To display all of the commands in the CLI DAS 3626 admin Command cable diag ports cfm linktrace cfm loopback clear clear address binding dhcp snoop binding entry ports clear arptable clear attack_log clear cfm pkt_cnt clear counters clear ethernet_oam ports clear fdb clear historical_counters ports clear igmp snooping data_driven_group clear igmp snooping statistic counter clear log clear mac_based_access_ control auth_mac clear mld_ snooping data_driven_group clear mld _ snooping statistic counter clear port _security entry clear vlan_counter statistics q Quit nl Next Page ENTER Next Entry al All 471 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual
165. ard Engine has been activated by a high CPU utilization rate mode strict fuzzy Used to select the type of Safeguard Engine to be activated by the Switch when the CPU utilization reaches a high rate The user may select strict f selected this function will instruct the Switch to minimize the IP and ARP traffic flow to the CPU by dynamically allotting an even bandwidth to all traffic flows fuzzy f selected this function will stop accepting all ARP packets not intended for the Switch and will stop receiving all unnecessary broadcast IP packets until the storm has subsided Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the safeguard engine for the Switch DAS 3626 admin config safeguard engine state enable utilization rising 45 Command config safeguard_engine state enable utilization rising 45 Success DAS 3626 admin 291 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show safeguard_engine Purpose Used to display current Safeguard Engine settings Syntax show safeguard_engine Description This command is used to list the current status and type of the Safeguard Engine settings currently configured Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the safeguard engine status DAS 3626 admin show safeguard_engine Command show safeguard engine Safeguard Engine State Disabled Safeguard Engine Current Status Norm
166. assigned to the Switch s Q2 queue e Priority 1 is assigned to the Switch s QO queue e Priority 2 is assigned to the Switch s Q1 queue e Priority 3 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 queue e Priority 4 is assigned to the Switch s Q4 queue e Priority 5 is assigned to the Switch s Q5 queue e Priority 6 is assigned to the Switch s Q6 queue e Priority 7 is assigned to the Switch s Q7 queue Priority scheduling is implemented by the priority queues stated above The Switch will empty the eight hardware priority queues in order beginning with the highest priority queue 7 to the lowest priority queue 0 Each hardware queue will transmit all of the packets in its buffer before permitting the next lower priority to transmit its packets When the lowest hardware priority queue has finished transmitting all of its packets the highest hardware priority queue will begin transmitting any packets it may have received The mapping of DSCP to COS will be used to determine the priority of the packet which will be then used to determine the scheduling queue when the Switch is in DSCP trust state The commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config scheduling lt class_id 0 7 gt weight lt value 1 255 gt config scheduling_mechanism strict wrr show scheduling config 802 1p user_priority lt priority 0 7 gt lt class_id 0 7 gt confi
167. ast_member_query_interval lt sec 1 25 gt state enable disable version lt value 1 3 gt enable igmp_ snooping show igmp_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt disable igmp_snooping show igmp_ snooping group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt lt ipaddr gt data_driven ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt config igmp_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipaddr gt add delete lt portlist gt searignp snooprgstaisiceauner show router ports vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid_list gt all static dynamic forbidden Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 160 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config igmp_snooping Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure IGMP snooping on the Switch config igmp_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt jall state enable disable fast_leave enable disable report_suppression enable disable This command allows the user to configure IGMP snooping on the Switch lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured lt vidlist gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured state enable disable Allows users
168. at can be up to 32 characters add Used to associate a profile to a multicast VLAN delete Used to remove a profile from a multicast VLAN lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the IPv4 multicast VLAN group profile to be associated the specified multicast VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 177 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To add a group to an IGMP Multicast VLAN DAS 3626 admini config igmp_snooping multicast _vlan_group mvl add profile name RG Command config igmp_ snooping multicast vlan_group mvl add profile name RG Success DAS 3626 admin show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group Purpose Used to display the multicast groups configured for the specified IGMP Multicast VLAN Syntax show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command is used to display the multicast groups configured for the specified IGMP Multicast VLAN Parameters vian_name The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters Restrictions None Example usage To display the multicast groups configured for an IGMP Multicast VLAN DAS 3626 admini show igmp snooping multicast_vlan_group RG Command show igmp snooping multicast _vlan_group RG VLAN ID Multicast Group Profiles DAS 3626 admin delete igmp_snooping mult
169. ate DAS 3626 admin To display the IPv6 neighbors of a configured IP interface config ipv6 nd ns ipif Purpose Used to configure the parameters for Neighbor solicitation messages to be sent from the switch Syntax config ipv6 nd ns ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt retrans_time lt uint 0 4294967295 gt Description This command will configure the parameters for Neighbor Solicitation messages sent from the switch These messages are used to detect IPv6 neighbors on the switch Parameters lt ipif_name 12 gt Enter the IPv6 interface name for which to dispatch Neighbor solicitation messages retrans_time lt uint 0 4294967295 gt Use this field to set the interval in milliseconds that the Switch will produce Neighbor Solicitation packets to be sent out over the local network This is used to discover IPv6 neighbors on the local link The user may select a time between 0 and 4294967295 milliseconds Very fast intervals represented by a low number are not recommended for this field Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the retrans time of a configured IP interface DAS 3626 admin config ipv6 nd ns ipif System retrans time 1000000 Command config ipv6 nd ns ipif System retrans_time 1000000 Success DAS 3626 admin 52 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show ipv6 nd Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions
170. ault is 120 seconds authfail lt int 2 20 gt Allows the administrator to set the maximum number of attempts that a user may try to logon utilizing SSH authentication After the maximum number of attempts is exceeded the Switch will be disconnected and the user must reconnect to the Switch to attempt another login rekey 10min 30min 60min never Sets the time period that the Switch will change the security shell encryptions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the SSH server DAS 3626 admin config ssh server maxsession 2 contimeout 300 authfail 2 Command config ssh server maxsession 2 contimeout 300 authfail 2 Success DAS 3626 admin 321 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show ssh server Purpose Used to display the SSH server setting Syntax show ssh server Description This command is used to display the current SSH server setting Parameters None Restrictions None Usage example To display the SSH server DAS 3626 admin show ssh server Command show ssh server The SSH Server Configuration Max Session 8 Connection Timeout 120 Authfail Attempts 2 Rekey Timeout Never DAS 3626 admin 322 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config ssh user Purpose Used to configure the SSH user Syntax config ssh user lt username 15 gt authmode hostbased hostname
171. aved switch configuration will be loaded into the Switch s memory each time the Switch is restarted config lt config_id 1 2 gt Specify to save current settings to configuration file 1 or 2 log Specify to save current Switch log to NV RAM all Specify to save all configuration settings If nothing is specified after save the Switch will save all current configuration to non volatile RAM Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To save the Switch s current configuration to non volatile RAM DAS 3626 admin save Command save Saving all configurations to NV RAM Done DAS 3626 admin 25 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual reboot Purpose Used to restart the Switch Syntax Reboot force_agree Description This command is used to restart the Switch Parameters force_agree When force_agree is specified the reboot command will be executed immediatedly without further confirmation Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To restart the Switch DAS 3626 admin reboot Command reboot Are you sure you want to proceed with the system reboot yln y Please wait the switch is rebooting Purpose Used to reset the Switch to the factory default settings Syntax reset config system force_agree Description This command is used to restore the Switch s configuration to the d
172. aved version of the configuration settings of the switch Syntax show config current_config config_in_nvram information Description This command is used to display all the configuration settings that are saved to NV RAM or display the configuration settings as they are currently configured Use the keyboard to list settings one line at a time Enter one page at a time Space or view all a The configuration settings are listed by category in the following order 1 Basic serial port Telnet and web 13 VLAN management status 14 FDB forwarding data base storm control 15 MAC address table notification IP group management 16 STP syslog 17 SSH QoS 18 SSL port mirroring 19 ACL traffic segmentation 20 SNTP port 21 IP route port lock 22 LACP 8021x 23 ARP SNMPv3 24 IP management SNMP traps 25 IGMP snooping RMON 26 access authentication control TACACS etc 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a e N gt O Parameters current_config Entering this parameter will display configurations entered without being saved to NVRAM config_inNVRAM Entering this parameter will display configurations entered and saved to NVRAM information Entering this parameter will display the global information for the configuration settings Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To view the current configuration settings 40 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet
173. ay hops lt value 1 16 gt time lt sec 0 65535 gt Description This command is used to configure the DHCP BOOTP relay feature Parameters hops lt value 1 16 gt Specifies the maximum number of relay agent hops that the DHCP packets can cross time lt sec 0 65535 gt If this time is exceeded the Switch will relay the DHCP packet Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config DHCP relay DAS 3626 admini config dhcp relay hops 2 time 23 Command config dhcp relay hops 2 time 23 Success DAS 3626 admin config dhcp_relay add ipif Purpose Used to add an IP destination address to the switch s DHCP BOOTP relay table Syntax config dhcp_relay add ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt Description This command adds an IP address as a destination to forward relay DHCP BOOTP relay packets to Parameters lt ipif_ name 12 gt The name of the IP interface in which DHCP relay is to be enabled lt ijpaddr gt The DHCP server IP address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add an IP destination to the DHCP relay table DAS 3626 admini config dhcp relay add ipif System 10 58 44 6 Command config dhcp relay add ipif System 10 58 44 6 Success DAS 3626 admin config dhcp_relay delete ipif Purpose Used to delete one or all IP destination addresses from the Switch s DHCP BOOTP rel
174. ay table Syntax config dhcp_relay delete ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt Description This command is used to delete an IP destination addresses in the Switch s DHCP BOOTP relay table Parameters lt ipif_name 12 gt The name of the IP interface that contains the IP address below lt ipaddr gt The DHCP server IP address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 79 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To delete an IP destination from the DHCP relay table DAS 3626 admini config dhcp relay delete ipif System 10 58 44 6 Command config dhcp relay delete ipif System 10 58 44 6 Success DAS 3626 admin config dhcp_relay option_82 state Purpose Used to configure the state of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the switch Syntax config dhcp_relay option_82 state enable disable Description This command is used to configure the state of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the switch Parameters enable When this field is toggled to Enabled the relay agent will insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP server and client When the relay agent receives the DHCP request it adds the option 82 information and the IP address of the relay agent if the relay agent is configured to the packet Once the option 82 information has been added to the packet it is sent on to
175. cast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters add Used to associate a profile to a multicast VLAN delete Used to de associate a profile from a multicast VLAN lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the MLD multicast VLAN group profile to be associated or de associated to the specified multicast VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 187 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To associate an MLD multicast VLAN group profile g1 to MLD multicast VLAN mv1 DAS 3626 admini config mld_snooping multicast _vlan_ group mvl add profile name gl Command config mld_snooping multicast vlan_group mv1 add profile name gl Success DAS 3626 admin show mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group Purpose Used to display the multicast groups configured for the specified MLD multicast VLAN Syntax show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command is used to display the multicast groups configured for the specified MLD multicast VLAN Parameters vlan_name The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters If not specified all IPv6 multicast VLAN groups will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the multicast groups configured for an MLD multicast VLAN DAS 3626 admin show mld_snooping
176. cfm linktrace lt macaddr gt mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt ttl lt int 2 255 gt pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt show cfm linktrace mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt trans_id lt uint gt sowens 255 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create cfm md Purpose Used to create a maintenance domain Syntax create cfm md lt string 22 gt level lt int 0 7 gt Description Different maintenance domains should have different names Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name level Specifies the maintenance domain level Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a CFM maintenance domain DAS 3626 admini create cfm md op domain level 2 Command create cfm md op domain level 2 Success DAS 3626 admin config cfm md Purpose Used to configure parameters of a maintenance domain Syntax config cfm md lt string 22 gt mip none auto explicit sender_id none chassis manage chassis_manage Description Creation of MIPs on a MA is useful for tracing the link MIP by MIP It also allows the user to perform loop back from MEP to an MIP Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain
177. chniques per user defined method list TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS local none for authentication These techniques will be listed in an order preferable and defined by the user for normal user authentication on the Switch and may contain up to eight authentication techniques When a user attempts to access the Switch the Switch will select the first technique listed for authentication If the first technique goes through its server hosts and no authentication is returned the Switch will then go to the next technique listed in the server group for authentication until the authentication has been verified or denied or the list is exhausted Please note that user granted access to the Switch will be granted normal user privileges on the Switch To gain access to admin level privileges the user must enter the enable admin command which is only available for logining in the Switch from the three versions of the TACACS server and then enter a password which was previously configured by the administrator of the Switch 327 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual NOTE TACACS XTACACS and TACACS are separate entities and are not compatible The Switch and the server must be configured exactly the same using the same protocol For example if the y Switch is set up for TACACS authentication so must be the host server The Access Authentication Control commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed
178. cified DHCP server packets by any specified DHCP client it is useful when one or more than one DHCP servers are present on the network and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients Enabling the DHCP filter for the first time will create both an access profile and access rule per port following this other access rules can be created These rules are used to block all DHCP server packets Similarly the addition of a permit DHCP entry will create one access profile and one access rule the first time the DHCP client MAC address is the client MAC address and the Source IP address is the same as the DHCP server s IP address UDP port number 67 These rules are used to permit the DHCP server packets with specific fileds which the user configures When the DHCP Server filter function is enabled all DHCP Server packets will be filtered from a specific port Also you are allowed to create entries for specific port based Server IP address and Client MAC address binding entries Be aware that the DHCP Server filter function must be enabled first Once all settings are complete all DHCP Server packets will be filtered from a specific port except those that meet the Server IP Address and Client MAC Address binding NetBIOS Filtering Setting When the NetBIOS filter is enabled all NetBIOS packets will be filtered from the specified port Enabling the NetBIOS filter will create one access profile and create three access rules per port
179. cifies a range of ports to apply this command group _id The id of protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 characters vian Vlan that is to be associated with this protocol group on this port vian_id Specifies the VLAN id priority Specifies the priority to be associated with the packet which has been classified to the specified vlan by the protocol Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage The example is to assign VLAN marketing 1 for untaged IPv6 packet ingress from port 3 To configure the group ID 1 on port 3 to be associated with VLAN marketing 1 DAS 3626 admini config port dotlv ports 3 add protocol group group_id 1 vlan marketing 1 config port dotlv ports 3 add protocol group group_id 1 vlan marketing 1 DAS 3626 admin show port dot1v Purpose Display the VLAN to be associated with untagged packet ingressed from a port based on the protocol group Syntax show port dot1v ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the VLAN to be associated with untagged packet ingressed from a port based on the protocol group Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to apply this command Restrictions None Example usage The example display the protocol VLAN information for ports 1 2 146 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDS
180. cifies that local use 4 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 20 from the list above local5 Specifies that local use 5 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 21 from the list above local6 Specifies that local use 6 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 22 from the list above local7 Specifies that local use 7 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 23 from the list above udp_port lt udp_port_number gt Specifies the UDP port number that the syslog protocol will use to send messages to the remote host state enable disable Allows the sending of syslog messages to the remote host specified above to be enabled and disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage 458 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual To create a Syslog host DAS 3626 admin tcreate syslog host 1 severity all facility local0 ipaddress 1 1 1 1 Command create syslog host 1 severity all facility local0 ipaddress 1 1 1 1 Success DAS 3626 admin config syslog host Purpose Used to configure the syslog protocol to send system log data to a remote host Syntax config syslog host all lt index 1 4 gt severity informational warning all facility local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
181. ck detection settings on the switch lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports for the loop back detection all Specifies all ports for the loop back detection None 209 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To show loop detect ports DAS 3626 admin show loopdetect ports 1 3 Command show loopdetect ports 1 3 Loopdetect State Loop Status Enabled Enabled Enabled DAS 3626 admin Normal Normal Normal config loopdetect trap Purpose Synta x Descr iption Para meter s Restri ction s Example usage This command is used to config trap modes config loopdetect trap none loop_detected loop_cleared both The loop detect trap is sent when the loop condition is detected The loop detect will be cleared when the trap is sent and the loop condition is cleared none Trap will not be sent for both cases loop_detected Trap is sent when the loop condition is detected loop_cleared Trap is sent when the loop condition is cleared both Trap will be sent for both cases Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To config loop trap both DAS 3626 admin config loopdetect trap both Command config loopdetect trap both Success DAS 3626 admin 210 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Mu tiple SPANNING TREE Protocot MSTP Commanps This Switch s
182. command There are three choices as to the method SSH will use to authorize the user and they are password publickey and hostbased Configure the encryption algorithm that SSH will use to encrypt and decrypt messages sent between the SSH Client and the SSH Server Finally enable SSH on the Switch using the enable ssh command After following the above steps users can configure an SSH Client on the remote PC and manage the Switch using secure in band communication The Secure Shell SSH commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table 303 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual feabesn OSOOSOSOSOSCSCSC assess OOOSOSOSOSCSCSCSCSCSCSC stowssnaurmose POSS config ssh server maxsession lt int 1 8 gt contimeout lt sec 120 600 gt authfail lt int 2 20 gt rekey 10min SS 30min 60min never show ssh server show ssh server server config ssh user lt username 15 gt authmode III hostname lt domain_name 32 gt hostname_IP lt domain_name 32 gt lt ipaddr gt e M password publickey show ssh user authmode ssh user authmode config ssh algorithm Pa AES128 AES192 AES256 arcfour blowfish cast128 twofish128 twofish192 twofish256 MD5 SHA1 RSA DSA enable disable 304 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters 305 DAS 36
183. command is used to enable CFM globally Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable CFM DAS 3626 admin enable cfm Command enable cfm Success DAS 3626 admin disable cfm Purpose Used to disable CFM globally Syntax disable cfm Description This command is used to disable CFM globally Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 262 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To disable CFM DAS 3600 12 4 disable cfm Command disable cfm Success DAS 3600 12 4 config cfm ports Purpose Used to enable or disable CFM function on per port basis Syntax config cfm ports lt portlist gt state enable disable Description By default CFM function is disabled on all ports If CFM is disabled on a port e MIPs are never created on that port e MEPs can still be created on that port and the configuration can be saved e MEPs created on that port can never generate or process CFM PDUs If the user issues a Loop back or Linktrace test on those MEPs it will prompt user that CFM function is disabled on that port Parameters ports Specifies the logical port list state Is used to enable or disable CFM function Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure
184. configure the rate limitation to no limit Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure rate limitation DAS 3626 admin config mld_snooping rate limit ports 1 100 Command config mld_snooping rate _limit ports 1 100 Success DAS 3626 admin 198 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show mld_snooping forwarding Purpose Used to display the current MLD snooping forwarding information on the Switch Syntax show mld_snooping forwarding vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt Description This command will display the current MLD forwarding information on the Switch Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view MLD snooping forwarding information If not specified all VLAN s MLD snooping forwarding information will be displayed lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to view MLD snooping forwarding information If not specified all VLAN s MLD snooping forwarding information will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To view the current MLD snooping forwarding information DAS 3626 admin show mld_snooping forwarding Command show mld_snooping forwarding VLAN Name default Source IP uN Multicast Group FF12 1 Port Member 23 VLAN Name default Source IP iis Multicast Group FF12 2 Port Member 3 Total Entries 2 DAS 3626
185. confirmation Success DAS 3626 admin NOTICE In case of lost passwords or password corruption please refer to the Password Recovery Command List section in this manual and the Password Recovery Procedure will guide you through the steps necessary to resolve this issue config account Purpose Used to configure user accounts Syntax config account lt username gt Description When the password information is not specified in the command the system will prompt the user to input the password interactively Parameters lt username gt Name of the account The account must already be defined Passwords must have a minimum of 0 character and can have a maximum of 15 characters Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Usernames can be between 1 and 15 characters Passwords can be between 0 and 15 characters Example usage To configure the user password of dlink account DAS 3626 admin config account dlink Command config account dlink Enter a old password Enter a case sensitive new password Enter the new password again for confirmation Success DAS 3626 admin DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show account Purpose Used to display user accounts Syntax show account Description This command is used to display all user accounts created on the Switch Up to 8 user accounts can exist at one time Paramet
186. connected to multicast enabled routers This ensures that the forbidden router port will not propagate routing packets out Parameters vlan_name The name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured vlanid list The VIDs of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured add delete Specifies to add or delete the router ports portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured as forbidden router ports Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set up port range 1 10 to static router ports DAS 3626 admini config mld_snooping mrouter ports forbidden vlan default add 1 10 Command config mld_snooping mrouter ports forbidden vlan default add 1 10 Success DAS 3626 admin 194 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable mld_snooping Purpose Used to enable MLD snooping on the switch Syntax enable mid_snooping Description This command is used to enable MLD snooping on the switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable MLD snooping on the switch DAS 3626 admin enable mld_snooping Command enable mld_snooping Success DAS 3626 admin disable mid_snooping Purpose Used to disable MLD snooping on the switch Syntax disable mld_snooping Description This command is used to disable MLD snooping on the switch
187. create cfm ma opl md op domain Success DAS 3626 admin 257 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config cfm ma Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure a maintenance association config cfm ma lt string 22 gt md lt string 22 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt mip none auto explicit defer sender_id none chassis manage chassis_manage defer ccm_interval 10ms 100ms 1sec 10sec 1min 10min mepid_list add delete lt mepid_list gt The MEP list specified for a MA can be located in different devices MEPs must be created on ports of these devices explicitly An MEP will transmit CCM packets periodically across the MA The receiving MEP will verify these received CCM packets from other MEPs against this MEP list for the configuration integrity check md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name vianid Specifies the VLAN Identifier Different MAs must be associated with different VLANs mip Specifies the control creation of MIPs none No MIPs will be created auto MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MA if that port is not configured with an MEP of that MA explicit MIP can be created on any ports in this MA only if the next existent lower level has a MEP configured on that port and that port is not configured with a
188. ctual address assigned to the Switch must be known The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface CLI over the console serial port as follows 1 Starting at the command line prompt enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress XXX XXX XXX XXX Vyy yyy yyy yyy Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y s represent the corresponding subnet mask 2 Alternatively users can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx z Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch s Telnet or Web based management agent DAS 3626 admin config ipif System ipaddress 10 24 73 21 8 Command config ipif System ipaddress 10 24 73 21 8 Success DAS 3626 admin In the above example the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10 24 73 21 with a subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet SNMP MIB browser and the CLI or via the Web based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the Switch DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Usinc THE ConsoLe CLI
189. d Port role in Q in Q mode it can be either access port or uplink port access uplink tpid Allows the interoperation with devices on a public network by specifying ports 802 1p Specify whether to use the priority in the SP VLAN tag Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command You must be in the Q in Q mode Example usage To configure Q in Q DAS 3626 admin tconfig qinq v2 add uplink 25 26 Command config qing v2 add uplink 25 26 Success DAS 3626 admin 154 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Link AGGREGATION COMMANDS The link aggregation commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 6 gt type lacp static delete link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 6 gt config link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 6 gt master_port lt port gt ports lt portlist gt state enable disable algorithm ip_source_dest group_id lt value 1 6 gt algorithm lt portlist gt mode active passive Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create link_aggregation Purpose Used to create a link aggregation group on the Switch Syntax create link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 6 gt type lacp static Description This command will create a link aggrega
190. d is used to create the Q in Q configuration for a vlan include SPVID and TPID Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt Specifies a VLAN name lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Specifies a VLAN ID tpid lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TPID If no parameter specified TPID is Ox88A8 information Restrictions None 152 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To create Q in Q DAS 3626 admin create qinq v2 spvid 2 tpid 0x88A8 Command create qing v2 spvid 2 tpid 0x88A8 Success DAS 3626 admin delete qinq Purpose Used to remove Q in Q Syntax delete qinq lt vlan_name gt Description This command is used to remove a previously created Q in Q configuration Parameters lt vlan_name gt Specifies the VLAN name of the Q in Q configuration Restrictions None Example usage To delete Q in Q named v2 DAS 3626 admin delete qing v2 Command delete qing v2 Success DAS 3626 admin 153 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual configure qinq Purpose Used to configure Q in Q Syntax config qinq lt vlan_name gt add uplink access delete lt portlist gt tpid lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 802 1p lt priority 0 7 gt none 1 Description This command is used to configure the Q in Q VLAN mode for ports include port role in double tag VLAN mode 802 1P and port outer TPID Parameters lt vian_name gt vlan name ad
191. d is used to display information about the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the Switch s information DAS 3626 admin show switch Command show switch Device Type DAS 3600 12 Gigabit Ethernet Switch MAC Address 00 21 91 AF 37 D0 IP Address 10 24 73 21 Manual VLAN Name default Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Boot PROM Version Build 1 00 B002 Firmware Version Build 1 00 B035 Hardware Version A1 System Name System Location System Contact Spanning Tree Disabled GVRP Disabled IGMP Snooping Disabled MLD Snooping Disabled TELNET Enabled TCP 23 WEB Enabled TCP 80 SNMP Disabled SSL Status Disabled SSH Status Disabled 802 1x Disabled q Quit nl Next Page Next Entry A All Purpose Used to display the current Switch power temperature and fan status Syntax show device_status Description This command is used to display status of both the Switch s internal and external power temperature and fan status Parameters None Restrictions None 12 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the Switch status DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show device status Command show device status DAS 3626 admin show device status Command show device s
192. d link aggregation group Syntax delete link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 6 gt Description This command is used to delete a previously configured link aggregation group Parameters lt value 1 6 gt Specifies the group ID The Switch allows up to six link aggregation groups to be configured The group number identifies each of the groups Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete link aggregation group DAS 3626 admini delete link aggregation group_id 2 Command delete link_aggregation group_id 2 Success DAS 3626 admin config link_aggregation Purpose Used to configure a previously created link aggregation group Syntax config link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 6 gt master_port lt port gt ports lt portlist gt state enable disable Description This command allows users to configure a link aggregation group that was created with the create link_aggregation command above Parameters group _id lt value 1 6 gt Specifies the group ID The Switch allows up to 6 link aggregation groups to be configured The group number identifies each of the groups master_port lt port gt Master port ID Specifies which port by port number of the link aggregation group will be the master port All of the ports in a link aggregation group will share the port configuration with the master port ports lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range o
193. ddr 10 62 32 1 Success delete trusted_host network Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host network command above delete trusted host network lt network_address gt This command is used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host network command above lt network_address gt IP address and netmask of the trusted host network Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete a trusted host network IP address 10 62 31 1 16 DAS 3626 admini delete trusted_host network 10 62 32 1 16 Command delete trusted_host network 10 62 32 1 16 Success 114 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete trusted_host all Purpose Used to delete all trusted host entries made using the create trusted_host ipaddr and create trusted_host network commands above Syntax delete trusted _host all Description This command is used to delete all trusted host entries made using the create trusted_host ipaddr and create trusted_host network commands above Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete all trusted host entries DAS 3626 admini delete trusted_host all Command delete trusted_host all Success enable snmp traps Purpose Used to enable SNMP
194. default Success DAS 3626 admin 439 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Network Monitorinc Commanps The network monitoring commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters show packet ports lt portlist gt show error ports lt portlist gt show utilization cpu ports lt portlist gt show utilization dram show utilization flash clear counters ports lt portlist gt C C i OOSOSCSCSCSCSCSCSCSC S S S SC S assbiewyeog Si OOS sows Si create syslog host lt index 1 4 gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt severity informational warning all facility localO local local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7 udp_port lt udp_port_number gt state enable disable config syslog host all lt index 1 4 gt severity informational warning all facility localO local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7 udp_port lt udp_port_number gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt state enable disable severing OP clear attack laearatiackiog id upload attack_log_toTFTP mmm lt path_filename 64 gt config system_severity trap log all critical warning information Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 440 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show packet ports Purpo
195. define lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 packet_content destination_mac lt macaddr gt mask lt macmask gt source_mac lt macaddr gt mask lt macmask gt outer_tag lt hex 0x0 OxOfff gt mask lt hex Ox0 OxOfff gt offset1 lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset2 lt nex Ox0 Oxff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset3 lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset4 lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset5 lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset6 lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt 1 lipv6 class lt value 0 255 gt flowlabel lt hex Ox0 Oxfffff gt source_ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt mask lt ipv6mask gt destination_ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt mask lt ipv6mask gt tcp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt udp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt 1 port lt portlist gt all vianbased vlan_name lt vlan_name gt vian_id lt value 1 4094 gt permit priority lt value 0 7 gt replace_priority rx_rate no_limit lt value 1 15624 gt replace_dscp_with lt value 0 63 gt mirror deny time_range lt range_name 32 gt delete access_id lt value 1 1024 gt show access_profile profile_id lt value 1 12 gt profile_n
196. dicates that the Switch should examine the IP source address ip_destination Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP destination address ip_source_dest Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP source address and the destination address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure link aggregation algorithm for mac source dest DAS 3626 admini config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source dest Command config link aggregation algorithm mac_source dest Success DAS 3626 admin show link_aggregation Purpose Used to display the current link aggregation configuration on the Switch Syntax show link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 6 gt algorithm Description This command will display the current link aggregation configuration of the Switch Parameters lt value 1 6 gt Specifies the group ID The Switch allows up to 6 link aggregation groups to be configured The group number identifies each of the groups algorithm Allows users to specify the display of link aggregation by the algorithm in use by that group Restrictions None Example usage To display Link Aggregation configuration 157 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini show link aggregation Command show link aggregation Link Aggregation Algorithm MAC Source Dest Group ID Type Master Port Member Port Ac
197. disable the syslog function on the Switch DAS 3626 admin disable syslog Command disable syslog Success DAS 3626 admin 456 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show syslog Purpose Used to display the syslog protocol status as enabled or disabled Syntax show syslog Description This command is used to display the syslog status as enabled or disabled Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the current status of the syslog function DAS 3626 admin show syslog Command show syslog Syslog Global State Enabled DAS 3626 admin create syslog host Purpose Used to create a new syslog host Syntax create syslog host lt index 1 4 gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt severity informational warning all facility local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7 udp_port lt udp_port_number gt state enable disable Description This command is used to create a new syslog host Parameters lt index 1 4 gt Specifies that the command will be applied to an index of hosts There are four available indexes numbered 1 through 4 ipaddress lt ipaddr gt Specifies the IP address of the remote host where syslog messages will be sent severity Severity level indicator These are described in the following Bold font indicates that the corresponding severity level is currently supported on the Switch Numerical Severity
198. e Once the Switch enters the Password Recovery Mode all ports on the Switch will be disabled Boot Procedure vV1 00 B06 Power On Self Test oiesstees eiin he EER be eRe OR we EOS 100 MAC Address 00 19 5B EC 32 15 H W Version Al Please wait loading V1 00 B035 Runtime image 00 The switch is now entering Password Recovery Mode The switch is currently in Password Recovery Mode gt 3 In the Password Recovery Mode only the following commands can be used 474 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters reset config This command resets the whole configuration will be back to the default value reboot This command exits the Reset Password Recovery Mode and restarts the switch A confirmation message will be displayed to allow the user to save the current settings This command deletes all the previously created accounts reset password This command resets the password of the specified user If a lt username gt username is not specified the password of all users will be reset This command displays all previously created accounts 475
199. e lt centiseconds 250 1000 gt An MEP may generate 5 types of Fault Alarms as shown below by their priorities from high to low Cross connect CCM Received priority 5 Error CCM Received priority 4 Some Remote MEP Down priority 3 Some Remote MEP MAC Status Error priority 2 Some Remote MEP Defect Indication priority 1 If multiple types of faults occurr on a MEP only the fault of the highest priority will be alarmed mepname Specifies the MEP name It s unique among all MEPs configured on the device mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID It should be configured in MA s MEPID list md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name state Specifies the MEP administrative state enable MEP is enabled disable MEP is disabled This is the default value ccm Specifies the CCM transmission state enable CCM transmission enabled disable CCM transmission disabled This is the default value pdu_priority Specifies the 802 1p priority to be set in CCMs and LTMs messages transmitted by the MEP The default value is 7 fault_alarm Control types of fault alarms sent by the MEP all Specifies that all types of fault alarms will be sent mac_status Only Fault Alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Some Remote MEP MAC Status Error will be sent remote_ccm Only Fault Alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Some Remo
200. e fiber copper speed auto 10_half 10_full 100_half 100_full 1000 full master slave flow_control enable disable learning enable disable state enable disable description lt desc 1 32 gt clear_description Description This command allows for the configuration of the Switch s Ethernet ports Only the ports listed in the lt portlist gt will be affected Parameters all Configure all ports on the Switch lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured speed Allows the user to adjust the speed for a port or range of ports The user has a choice of the following e auto Enables auto negotiation for the specified range of ports e 10 100 1000 Configures the speed in Mbps for the specified range of ports Gigabit ports are statically set to 1000 and cannot be set to slower speeds When setting port speed to 1000_full user should specify master or slave mode for 1000 based TX interface and leave the 1000_full without any master or slave setting for other interfaces half full Configures the specified range of ports as either full duplex or half duplex flow_control enable disable Enable or disable flow control for the specified ports learning enable disable Enables or disables the MAC address learning on the specified range of ports medium_type Specify the medium type while the configured ports are combo ports It s an
201. e gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt TrellisCoding disable enable RateAdaptive fix rate adaptive RaMode decrease increase decrease MaxTxRate MaxRxRate MinTxRate MinRxRate lt vdsl_ speed 32 104960 gt SnrMarginTx SnrMarginRx max lt vdsl_snr_max 0 62 gt min lt vdsl_snr_min 0 62 gt target lt vdsl_snr_target 0 62 gt InterleaveDelayDn InterleaveDelayUp lt vdsl_inter_delay 0 62 gt MinInpDn MinInpUp lt vdsl_inp_min 0 32 gt PSDMask M2Cab 1 M1Cab 0 LimitPSDMask 21 nus0 0 eu32 1 eu64 2 BitSwap 22 disable 0 enable 1 RF1 23 G 993 2 1 disable 0 ReducedPSD 24 ds1 0 us1 1
202. e of VLANs that will be displayed lt value 1 1000 gt Specifies the rate of IGMP control packet that the switch can process on a specific port The rate is specified in packets per second The packets that exceeds the limited rate will be dropped The default setting is no_limit no_limit Allows users to configure the rate limitation to no limit Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure rate limitation DAS 3626 admini config igmp_ snooping rate limit ports 1 100 Command config igmp snooping rate_limit ports 1 100 Success DAS 3626 admin 169 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show igmp_snooping forwarding Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the current IGMP snooping forwarding information on the Switch show igmp_snooping forwarding vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt This command will display the current IGMP forwarding information on the Switch lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view IGMP snooping forwarding information If not specified all VLAN s IGMP snooping forwarding information will be displayed lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to view IGMP snooping forwarding information If not specified all VLAN s IGMP snooping forwarding information will be displayed
203. e operator hour 2 min 30 Command config time_zone operator hour 2 min 30 Success DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to enable and configure time adjustments to allow for the use of Daylight Savings Time DST Syntax config dst disable repeating s_week lt start_week 1 4 last gt s_day lt start_day sun sat gt s_mth lt start_mth 1 12 gt s_time start_time hh mm gt e_week lt end_week 1 4 last gt e_day lt end_day sun sat gt e_mth lt end_mth 1 12 gt e_time lt end_time hh mm gt offset 30 60 90 120 annual s_date start_date 1 31 gt s_mth lt start_mth 1 12 gt s_time lt start_time hh mm gt e_date lt end_date 1 31 gt e_mth lt end_mth 1 12 gt e_time lt end_time hh mm gt offset 30 60 90 120 Description This command is used to enable and configure DST When enabled this will adjust the system clock to comply with any DST requirement DST adjustment effects system time for both manually configured time and time set using SNTP service disable Disable the DST seasonal time adjustment for the Switch repeating Using repeating mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Repeating mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified using a formula For example specify to begin DST on Saturday during the second week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October annual Using annual mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Annu
204. e or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES192 encryption algorithm AES256 This parameter will enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES256 encryption algorithm arcfour This parameter will enable or disable the Arcfour encryption algorithm blowfish This parameter will enable or disable the Blowfish encryption algorithm cast128 This parameter will enable or disable the Cast128 encryption algorithm twofish128 This parameter will enable or disable the twofish128 encryption algorithm twofish192 This parameter will enable or disable the twofish192 encryption algorithm MD5 This parameter will enable or disable the MD5 Message Digest encryption algorithm SHA1 This parameter will enable or disable the Secure Hash Algorithm encryption RSA This parameter will enable or disable the RSA encryption algorithm DSA This parameter will enable or disable the Digital Signature Algorithm encryption enable disable This allows the user to enable or disable algorithms entered in this command on the Switch Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure SSH algorithm DAS 3626 admin config ssh algorithm blowfish enable Command config ssh algorithm blowfish enable Success DAS 3626 admin 325 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show ssh algorithm Purpose Used to display the SSH algorithm setting Sy
205. e other than the Switch called a server host and it must include usernames and passwords for authentication When the user is prompted by the Switch to enter usernames and passwords for authentication the Switch contacts the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify and the server will respond with one of three messages A The server verifies the username and password and the user is granted normal user privileges on the Switch B The server will not accept the username and password and the user is denied access to the Switch C The server doesn t respond to the verification query At this point the Switch receives the timeout from the server and then moves to the next method of verification configured in the method list The Switch has four built in server groups one for each of the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS protocols These built in server groups are used to authenticate users trying to access the Switch The users will set server hosts in a preferable order in the built in server group and when a user tries to gain access to the Switch the Switch will ask the first server host for authentication If no authentication is made the second server host in the list will be queried and so on The built in server group can only have hosts that are running the specified protocol For example the TACACS server group can only have TACACS server hosts The administrator for the Switch may set up five different authentication te
206. e profile_id and access_id parameters The new treatment has changed some of the command parameters as well Command Parameters create access _ profile profile_id lt value 1 1024 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt ethernet vlan mask lt hex 0x0 OxOfff gt source_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt destination mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt 802 1p ethernet_type 1 ipv4 vlan mask lt hex 0x0 OxOfff gt source_ip mask lt netmask gt destination_ip mask lt netmask gt dscp icmp type code igmp type tcp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt flag_mask all urg ack psh rst syn fin 1 udp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt protocol_id_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt user_define_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt 1 packet_content_mask destination_mac lt macmask gt source_mac lt macmask gt outer_tag lt hex Ox0 OxOfff gt offset I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset2 I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt offset3 I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt offset4 I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt offset I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt offset6 I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt 1 ipv6 class flowlabel source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt destination
207. e this command Example usage To config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream interleave delay DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default InterleaveDelayDn 10 Command config vdsl profile name default InterleaveDelayDn 10 Success DAS 3626 admin 430 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile MinInpDn MinInpUp Purpose Used to config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream minimum INP Impulse Noise Protection Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt MinInpDn MinInpUp lt vdsl_inp_min 0 32 gt Description This command is used to config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream minimum INP Impulse Noise Protection Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed MinInpDn MinInpUp To config VDSL profile Downstream Upstream minimum INP Impulse Noise Protection lt vdsl_inp_min 0 32 gt interleave delay Provisioned in steps of 125usec It mean 1 as 125usec 2 as 250 usec Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream minimum INP DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default MinInpDn 10 Command config vdsl profile name default MinInpDn 10 Success DAS 3626 admin 431 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual confi
208. ear igmp_snooping statistic counter Command clear igmp_snooping statistic counter Success DAS 3626 admin show igmp_snooping statistic counter Purpose Used to view the current IGMP snooping statistics on the Switch Syntax show igmp_snooping statistic counter vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to view this information snooping must be enabled first Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view IGMP snooping statistic counter lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to view IGMP snooping statistic counter lt portlist gt The list of the ports for which to view IGMP snooping statistic counter Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 173 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To view IGMP snooping statistic on VID 1 DAS 3626 admin show igmp snooping statistic counter vlanid 1 Command show igmp snooping statistic counter vlanid 1 default Group Number Receive Statistics Query IGMP v1 Query IGMP v2 Query IGMP v3 Query Total Dropped By Rate Limitation Dropped By Multicast VLAN Report amp Leave IGMP vl Report IGMP v2 Report IGMP v3 Report IGMP v2 Leave Total Dropped By Rate Limitation Dropped By Max Group Limitation Dropped By Group Filter Dropped By Multicast VLAN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
209. ear vdsl_counter lt vdsl_portlist gt all Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 413 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show vdsl brief_status Purpose Used to show VDSL brief status Syntax show vdsl brief_status alarms attenuation line_state profiles rate snrmargin txpower Description This command is used to show VDSL brief status such as VDSL counter alarm VDSL attenuation VDSL line state VDSL SNR margin VDSL Transmission power Parameters alarms display VDSL alarm counter including CRC RS ES attenuation display VDSL downstream upstream attenuation line_state display VDSL line link status profile setting uptime profiles display VDSL line brief profile rate display VDSL line downstream upstream data rate snrmargin display VDSL line downstream upstream SNR margin txpower display VDSL line downstream upstream Transmission power Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To show vdsl line downstream upstream Transmission powe DAS 3626 admin show vdsl brief_status txpower Command show vdsl brief_status txpower GET VDSL TXPOWER 1 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dom 2 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm 3 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm 4 txpower down up 12 4 7 7 dbm 5 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm 6 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm 7 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm 8 txpo
210. ed Multiple method lists must be created and configured separately Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given method list 347 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create authen_login method_list_name Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 348 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To create the method list Trinity 349 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini create authen_login method _list_name Trinity Command create authen_login method list_name Trinity Success DAS 3626 admin 350 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config authen_login Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to configure a user defined or default method list of authentication methods for user login config authen_login default method_list_name lt string 15 gt method tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius server_group lt string 15 gt local none This command is used to configure a user defined or default method list of authentication methods for users logging on to the Switch The sequence of methods implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a se
211. ed to configure the checking mechanism of DHCP BOOTP relay agent information option 82 of the switch Parameters enable When the field is toggled to enable the relay agent will check the validity of the packet s option 82 field If the switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client the switch drops the packet because it is invalid In packets received from DHCP servers the relay agent will drop invalid messages disable When the field is toggled to disable the relay agent will not check the validity of the packet s option 82 field Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure DHCP relay option 82 check DAS 3626 admini config dhcp relay option_82 check enable Command config dhcp relay option_82 check enable Success DAS 3626 admin config dhcp_relay option_82 policy Purpose Used to configure the reforwarding policy of relay agent information option 82 of the switch Syntax config dhcp_relay option_82 policy replace drop keep Description This command is used to configure the reforwarding policy of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the switch Parameters replace The option 82 field will be replaced if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client drop The packet will be dropped if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client keep
212. eeeesneeeeeessseeseeaeseeeeeseseseesesneeees 155 IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS iisiicsiiscsicnsnaicieraceacsaisiassastaisentensssntetancadaianssnsasieonideadeuaaacneiecusens 160 IGMP MULTICAST VLAN COMMANDG cccccccesseeeeeeecneeeeeeecneeeeeeseceeeeesseneeeeeseeeesseeeseeeaes 175 MLD MULTICAST VLAN COMMAND ccccccceesseeeeeeecneeeeeeeeneeeeeesecneeeeeeesseeseeeeeesesssensneeeees 183 MLD SNOOPING COMMAND LIST ccccccccssseeeeeeeeeneeeeeseceeeeeesscceeseeessneeeeessesseeeseeeesssensseneees 191 PORT MIRRORING COMMAND 0 cccceeessseceeeeeeeeceeeeeseeneeeeeasseeeeeeesseneeseessenneeeeasessesseeeeaes 204 LOOP BACK DETECTION COMMAND ccccecesesteeeseesceeeeeesseneeseeeseneeeeesseeseseessesesneeeees 207 MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL MSTP COMMANDG ccccsseessessseeseseneees 211 FORWARDING DATABASE COMMANDG ccccccccsteeceeesssneeeeeeecneeeeessenneeeeesssneeseeeseneeeeaseaes 247 CONNECTIVITY FAULT MANAGEMENT COMMAND 0000 cccseseeeseseeeeeesecneeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeees 254 VLAN COUNTER COMMANDS visiisiicssciecssccsesteccdincteatinaisactradeascucarserddancrandintlcaessodenaudbisaduivieaes 273 QOS COMMANDS ai venacaince r r ceaceasseaciavacueundssvontinmnesnatecsveecsadstesduaabieatacnnesctiaisdesniaunins 276 TRAFFIC CONTROL COMMAND 0 ccccceeeeeesesneeeeeesenneeeeeseseeeeeassnneeeeesssnneeeeassseeseneseneeeeees 286 SAFEGUARD ENGINE COMMAND Sir vvsisiiesecscciccsinstciaicisasancinsanssaves
213. efault settings assigned from the factory Parameters config If the keyword config is specified all of the factory default settings are restored on the Switch including the IP address user accounts and the switch history log The Switch will not save or reboot system If the keyword system is specified all of the factory default settings are restored on the Switch The Switch will save and reboot after the settings are changed to default Rebooting will clear all entries in the Forwarding Data Base force_agree When force_agree is specified the reset command will be executed immediatedly without further confirmation If no parameter is specified the Switch s current IP address banner user accounts and the switch history log are not changed All other parameters are restored to the factory default settings The Switch will not save or reboot Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To restore all of the Switch s parameters to their default values DAS 3626 admin reset config Command reset config Are you sure you want to proceed with system reset y n y Success DAS 3626 admin 26 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to log in a user to the Switch s console Syntax login Description This command is used to initiate the login procedure The user will be prompted for a Username and Password
214. erence Manual delete mid_snooping static_group Purpose Used to delete the current MLD snooping static group on the Switch Syntax delete mld_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipv6addr gt Description This command is used to delete an MLD snooping static group will not affect the MLD snooping dynamic member ports of a group Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping static group information will be deleted lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which MLD snooping static group information will be deleted lt jpv6addr gt The static group IPv6 address for which MLD snooping static group information will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a static group FF12 1 on VID 1 DAS 3626 admini delete mld_snooping static_group vlanid 1 FF12 1 Command delete mld_snooping static group vlanid 1 FF12 1 Success DAS 3626 admin config mild_snooping static_group Purpose Used to configure the current MLD snooping static group on the Switch Syntax config mld_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipv6addr gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command is used to add or delete ports to from the given static group Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to
215. ers None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the accounts that have been created DAS 3626 admin show account Command show account Current Accounts Access Level Total Entries DAS 3626 admin delete account Purpose Used to delete an existing user account Syntax delete account lt username gt Description This command is used to delete an existing account Parameters lt username gt Name of the user who will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the user account System DAS 3626 admin delete account System Command delete account System Success DAS 3626 admin DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to display a list of currently logged in users Syntax show session Description This command is used to display a list of all the users that are logged in at the time the command is issued Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To display a list of current logged in users DAS 3626 admin show session Command show session 00 00 16 250 Serial Port Anonymous Total Entries 1 Ei Quit Hl Next Page Previous Page f Refresh Purpose Used to display general information about the Switch Syntax show switch Description This comman
216. escription This command allows users to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast enabled routers This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the multicast enabled router regardless of protocol etc Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the router port resides lt vid_list gt The VIDs of the VLAN on which the router port resides add delete Specifies whether to add or delete router ports of the specified VLAN lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports that will be configured as router ports Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set up static router ports DAS 3626 admini config router_ports vlan default add 1 10 Command config router ports vlan default add 1 10 Success DAS 3626 admin config router_ports_forbidden Purpose Used to configure ports as forbidden multicast router ports Syntax config router_ports_forbidden vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command allows designation of a port or range of ports as being forbidden to multicast enabled routers This will ensure that multicast packets will not be forwarded to this port regardless of protocol etc Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the router port resides lt vid_list gt The VIDs of the VL
217. ess profile profile id 1 add access id 1 ip source_ip 10 42 73 1 port 7 deny Command config access_profile profile id 1 add access_id 1 ip source_ip 10 42 73 1 port 7 deny Success DAS 3626 admin Address However ARP is vulnerable as it can be easily spoofed and utilized to attack a LAN known as ARP spoofing attack For a more detailed explaination on how ARP protocol works and how to employ D Link s advanced unique Packet Content ACL to prevent an ARP spoofing attack please see Appendix B at the end of this manual i S NOTE Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the standard for finding a host s hardware address MAC show access_profile Purpose Used to display the currently configured access profiles on the Switch 405 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show access_ profile Syntax show access_ profile profile_id lt value 1 12 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Description This command is used to display the currently configured access profiles Parameters profile_id lt value 1 12 gt Specify the profile id to display only the access rules configuration for a single profile ID The user may enter a profile ID number between 1 and 12 yet remember only 12 access profiles can be created on the Switch profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Specifies the name of the profile The maximum length is 32 characters Restrictions None Example usage To display all of the cu
218. eters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the current port security configuration show port_security_entry ports lt portlist gt This command is used to display port security information of the Switch s ports The information displayed includes port security admin state maximum number of learning address and lock mode lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be viewed None To display the port security configuration DAS 3626 admin show port _security ports 1 5 Command show po rt_security ports 1 5 Port Configuration Port State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled DAS 3626 admin Lock Address Mode Learning Addr DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset DeleteOnReset enable port_security trap_log Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to enable the trap log for port security enable port_security trap_log This command is used to enable port security traps logs When this command is enabled if there s a new MAC that violates the pre defined port security configuration a trap will be sent out with the MAC and port informationt and the relevant information will be logged None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable the port security trap log setting DAS 3626 admin enable port_security trap_log Command enable port_security trap_log
219. etmask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the source IP address destination_ip_mask lt netmask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the destination IP address dscp Specifies that the Switch will examine the DiffServ Code Point DSCP field in each frame s header icmp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header type Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s ICMP Type field code Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s ICMP Code field igmp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field type Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s IGMP Type field tcp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Transmission Control Protocol TCP field src_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the source port dst_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the destination port flag_mask Enter the appropriate flag_mask parameter All incoming packets have TCP port numbers contained in them as the forwarding criterion These numbers have flag bits associated with them which are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may deny packets by denying certain flag bits within the packets The user may choose between all urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh pus
220. f ports that will belong to the link aggregation group state enable disable Allows users to enable or disable the specified link aggregation group Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Link aggregation groups may not overlap VDSL ports cannot be used for link aggreagation Example usage To define a load sharing group of ports group id 1 master port 5 with group members ports 5 7 9 DAS 3626 admini config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 5 ports 5 7 9 Command config link_aggregation group_id 1 master port 5 ports 5 7 9 Success DAS 3626 admin 156 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config link_aggregation algorithm Purpose Used to configure the link aggregation algorithm Syntax config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source mac_destination mac_source_dest ip_source ip_destination ip_source_dest Description This command configures the part of the packet examined by the Switch when selecting the egress port for transmitting load sharing data This feature is only available using the address based load sharing algorithm Parameters mac_source Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC source address mac_destination Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC destination address mac_source_dest Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC source and destination addresses ip_source In
221. fig vdsl pm_threshold 15min near_end es 100 Command config vdsl pm_threshold 15min near_end es 100 Success DAS 3626 admin 422 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show vdsl pm_threshold Purpose Used to show vdsl performance counter threshold Syntax show vdsl pm_threshold Description This command is used to shwo VDSL performance counter threshold Parameters Restrictions Only Administrator level users or Operation level can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl performance counter threshold DAS 3626 admin show vdsl pm_threshold Command show vdsl pm_threshold 15 min PM counters threshold values Near end Far end 1 day PM counters threshold values Near end Far end DAS 3626 admin create vdsl profile Purpose Used to create vdsl profile Syntax create vdsl profile lt profile_name 32 gt Description This command is used to create VDSL profile Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be created Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create vdsl profile DAS 3626 admin create vdsl profile profile_1 Command create vdsl profile profile_1 Success DAS 3626 admin 423 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile attach Purpose Used to config vdsl profile Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt
222. figures the multicast MAC address forwarding table Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt macaddr gt The MAC address that will be added to the multicast forwarding table add delete add will add ports to the forwarding table delete will remove ports from the multicast forwarding table lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add multicast MAC forwarding DAS 3626 admin config multicast _fdb default 01 00 00 00 00 01 add 1 5 Command config multicast _fdb default 01 00 00 00 00 01 add 1 5 Success DAS 3626 admin 248 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config fdb aging_time Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to set the aging time of the forwarding database config fdb aging_time lt sec 10 1000000 gt This command affects the learning process of the Switch Dynamic forwarding table entries which are made up of the source MAC addresses and their associated port numbers are deleted from the table if they are not accessed within the aging time The aging time can be from 10 to 1000000 seconds with a default value of 300 seconds A very long aging time can result in dynamic forwarding table entries that are out of date or no longer exist
223. filter_unregistered_groups Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs DAS 3626 admini config multicast vlan_filtering mode vlanid 200 300 forward_all_ groups Command config multicast vlan_filtering mode vlanid 200 300 forward_all_groups Success DAS 3626 admin show multicast vlan_filtering_mode Purpose Used to show the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs Syntax show multicast vlan_filtering_mode vlanid lt vidlist gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command is used to display the multicast packet filtering mode for VLAN Parameters vianid_list Specifies a range of vlans to be configured If no parameter specified the deivce will show all multicast filtering settings in the device Restrictions None Example usage To display multicast VLAN filtering mode for VLANs DAS 3626 admin show multicast vlan_filtering mode Command show multicast vlan_filtering_mode VLAN ID VLAN Name Multicast Filter Mode default forward_unregistered_ groups RG forward_unregistered_ groups DAS 3626 admin 253 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Connectivity FauLt MANAGEMENT ComMMANDS The Connectivity Fault Management commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table 254
224. finement dottad Specifies GVRP s PDU MAC address of NNI port using 802 1ad s definement Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the Join time to 200 milliseconds DAS 3626 admin config gvrp timer join 200 Command config gvrp timer join 200 Success DAS 3626 admin 148 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show gvrp Purpose Used to display the timer s value and NNI BPDU address of GVRP Syntax show gvrp Description This command is used to display the timer s value of GVRP Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the timer s value of GVRP DAS 3626 admin show gvrp Command show gvrp Join Time 200 Milliseconds Leave Time 600 Milliseconds LeaveAll Time 10000 Milliseconds NNI BPDU Address dotlad DAS 3626 admin 149 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Q in Q Commanps T Q in Q commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters enable qinq disable qinq show qinq create qinq lt vlan_name 32 gt spvid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt tpid lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt delete qinq lt vlan_name gt config qinq lt vlan_name gt add uplink access delete lt portlist gt tpid lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt 802 1p lt priority 0 7 gt none 1
225. g 802 1p default_priority lt portlist gt all lt priority 0 7 gt ows dP Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 276 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config scheduling Purpose Used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each COS queue Syntax config scheduling lt class_id 0 7 gt weight lt value 1 127 gt Description The Switch contains eight hardware priority queues Incoming packets must be mapped to one of these eight queues This command is used to specify the rotation by which these eight hardware priority queues are emptied The Priority scheduling implement on this Switch is Shaped Deficit Weighted Round Robin SDWRR queue scheduling The weight parameter allows the user to specify the available bandwidth for each queue In shaped WDRR if two or more queues have traffic eligible for transmission i e the deficit counter is greater than the packet size to be transmitted a round robin scheme among the queues is used while still preserving the overall weight ratios between the queues A value between 1 and 255 can be specified For example to evenly divide up the available bandwidth among the queues in the SDWRR set the weight of each of the queues to 1 and the bandwidth of each queue are 12 5 If the desired bandwidth division is 40 20 10 10 5 5 5 and 5 the weight asignment to each queue is set to 8 4 2 2 1 1 1 and 1 respect
226. g stp ports Purpose Used to setup STP on the port level Syntax config stp ports lt portlist gt externalCost auto lt value 1 200000000 gt hellotime lt value 1 2 gt migrate yes no edge true false auto restricted_tcn true false restricted_role true false p2p true false auto state enable disable fopdu enable disable 215 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp ports Description Parameters This command is used to create and configure STP for a group of ports lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports to be configured externalCost This defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list Port cost can be set automatically or as a metric value The default value is auto auto Setting this parameter for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified port s in the list for optimal efficiency Default port cost 100Mbps port 200000 Gigabit port 20000 lt value 1 200000000 gt Define a value between 1 and 200000000 to determine the external cost The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets hellotime lt value 1 2 gt The time interval between transmission of configuration messages by the designated port to other devices on the bridged LAN thus stating that the Switch is still
227. g vdsl profile PSDMask Purpose Used to config vdsl profile PSD mask Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt PSDMask M2Cab M1Cab Description This command is used to config vdsl profile PSD mask Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed PSDMask To config VDSL profile PSD mask M2Cab M1Cab support M1 CAB or M2 CAB Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile vdsl profile PSD mask DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default PSDMask M1Cab Command config vdsl profile name default PSDMask M1Cab Success DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile LimitPSDMask Purpose Used to config vdsl profile limit PSD mask Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt LimitPSDMask nusO eu32 eu64 Description This command is used to config vdsl profile limit PSD mask Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed LimitPSDMask To config VDSL profile limit PSD mask nusO0 limit psd mask to AnnexA NUSO_D 32 eu32 limit psd mask to AnnexA EU 32_D 32 eu64 limit psd mask to AnnexB EU 64_D 64 Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile vdsl
228. gt Description This command is used to configure a static entry in the ARP Table The user may specify the IP address and the corresponding MAC address of an entry in the Switch s ARP table Parameters lt jpaddr gt The IP address of the end node or station lt macaddr gt The MAC address corresponding to the IP address 75 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config arpentry Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure a static arp entry for the IP address 10 48 74 12 and MAC address 00 50 BA 00 07 36 DAS 3626 admin config arpentry 10 48 74 12 00 50 BA 00 07 36 Command config arpentry 10 48 74 12 00 50 BA 00 07 36 Success DAS 3626 admin delete arpentry Purpose Used to delete a static entry into the ARP table Syntax delete arpentry lt ipaddr gt all Description This command is used to delete a static ARP entry made using the create arpentry command above by specifying either the IP address of the entry or all Specifying all clears the Switch s ARP table Parameters lt jpaddr gt The IP address of the end node or station all Deletes all ARP entries Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete an entry of IP address 10 48 74 121 from the ARP table DAS 3626 admin delete arpentry 10 48 74 121 Command delete arpentry 10 48 74
229. h rst reset syn synchronize and fin finish udp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s User Datagram Protocol UDP field src_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt Specifies a UDP port mask for the source port dst_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt Specifies a UDP port mask for the destination port protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the Switch will examine the protocol field in each packet and if this field contains the value entered here apply the following rules user_define_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt Specifies that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID and the mask options behind the IP header packet_content_mask Allows users to examine up to 4 specified offset_chunk within a packet at one time and specifies that the Switch will mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified as follows 399 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create access_profile packet_content_mask destination_mac lt macmask gt source_mac lt macmask outer_tag lt hex 0x0 OxOfff gt offset I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt offset2 I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset3 I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset4 I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt offsets I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex Ox0 Oxff gt offset6 I2 13 14 lt value 0 12
230. h will then discard the BDPU packet and the information held for the port will age out The user may set a hop count from 7 to 20 The default is 20 hellotime lt value 1 2 gt The user may set the time interval between transmission of configuration messages by the root device thus stating that the Switch is still functioning A time between 7 and 2 seconds may be chosen with a default setting of 2 seconds hellotime must be set using the configure stp ports command for switches La iy NOTE In MSTP the spanning tree is configured by port and therefore the l utilizing the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol forwarddelay lt value 4 30 gt The maximum amount of time in seconds that the root device will wait before changing states The user may choose a time between 4 and 30 seconds The default is 15 seconds txholdcount lt value 1 10 gt The maximum number of BPDU Hello packets transmitted per interval Default value is 6 fbpdu enable disable Allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices when STP is disabled on the Switch The default is enable nni_bpdu_addr dot1d dot1ad Configure NNI port address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure STP with maxage 18 and maxhops of 15 DAS 3626 admin tconfig stp maxage 18 maxhops 15 Command config stp maxage 18 maxhops 15 Success DAS 3626 admin confi
231. hange the port list the new port list will replace the previous port list if add or delete is not specified The member port list and source port list can not overlap However the member port of one MLD multicast VLAN can overlap with another MLD multicast VLAN The MLD multicast VLAN must be created first before configuration Parameters lt vian_name gt The name of the VLAN to be created Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters Member_port A range of member ports to add to the multicast VLAN They will become the untagged member port of the MLD multicast VLAN tag_member_port Specifies the tagged member port of the MLD multicast VLAN source_port A range of source ports to add to the multicast VLAN State enable or disable multicast VLAN for the chosen VLAN replace_source_ip With the MLD snooping function the MLD report packet sent by the host will be forwarded to the source port Before the forwarding of the packet the source IP address in the join packet needs to be replaced by this IPv6 address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 184 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To config MLD multicast VLAN mv1 DAS 3626 admini config mld_snooping multicast_vlan mvl add member port 1 3 state enable Command config mld_snooping multicast vlan mvl add member port 1 3 state enable Success
232. he log number of X and Y For example show dangerous log index 1 5 will display the dangerous log messages from 1 to 5 If no parameter specified all dangerous log entries will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To show dangerous messages on master DAS 3626 admin show attack_log Command show attack_log Index Time 00000 days 01 25 43 Possible spoofing attack from 000d01002301 port 6 00000 days 01 25 43 Possible spoofing attack from 000d01002301 port 6 DAS 3626 admin clear attack_log Purpose Used to clear the switch s dangerous log Syntax clear attack_log Description This command is used to clear the switch s dangerous log Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear the master s dangerous log DAS 3626 admini clear attack_log Command clear attack_log Success DAS 3626 admin 463 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual upload attack_log_to TFTP Purpose Used to upload the switch s dangerous log Syntax upload attack_log_toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt lt path_filename 64 gt Description This command is used to upload the switch s dangerous log Parameters lt jpaddr gt The IP address of the TFTP server The TFTP server must be on the same IP subnet as the switch lt path_filename 64 gt Specifies the location of the file on the TFTP server
233. he month and four numerical characters for the year For example 03aug2003 time Express the system time using the format hh mm ss that is two numerical characters each for the hour using a 24 hour clock the minute and second For example 19 42 30 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Manually configured system time and date settings are overridden if SNTP support is enabled Example usage To manually set system time and date settings DAS 3626 admin config time 30jun2003 16 30 30 Command config time 30jun2003 16 30 30 Success DAS 3626 admin config time_zone Purpose Used to determine the time zone used in order to adjust the system clock Syntax config time_zone operator hour lt gmt_hour 0 13 gt min lt minute 0 59 gt Description This command will adjust system clock settings according to the time zone Time zone settings will adjust SNTP information accordingly Parameters operator Choose to add or subtract time to adjust for time zone relative to GMT hour Select the number of hours different from GMT min Select the number of minutes difference added or subtracted to adjust the time zone Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure time zone settings 122 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini config time_zon
234. he name of the VLAN to be modified lt name gt Enter a name for the VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vlan vlanid on the switch DAS 3626 admin tconfig vlan vlanid 5 add tagged 7 advertisement enable name RG Command config vlan vlanid 5 add tagged 7 advertisement enable name RG Success DAS 3626 admin 139 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to configure GVRP on the Switch Syntax config port_vlan lt portlist gt all gvrp_state enable disable ingress_checking enable disable acceptable_frame tagged_only admit_all pvid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to configure the Group VLAN Registration Protocol on the Switch Ingress checking the sending and receiving of GVRP information and the Port VLAN ID PVID can be configured Parameters lt portlist gt A port or range of ports for which users want to enable GVRP for all Specifies all of the ports on the Switch state enable disable Enables or disables GVRP for the ports specified in the port list ingress_checking enable disable Enables or disables ingress checking for the specified port list acceptable_frame tagged_only admit_all This parameter states the frame type that will be accepted by the Switch for this function tagged_only implies that only VLAN tagged frames will be accepted
235. his command is used to create a MLD multicast_vlan Multiple multicast VLANs can be configured The MLD multicast VLAN being created can not exist in the 1Q VLAN database Multiple MLD multicast VLANs can be created The MLD Multicast VLAN snooping function co exists with the 1Q VLAN snooping function Parameters lt vian_name gt The name of the VLAN to be created Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters vlanid The VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN to be create The range is 2 4094 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create MLD multicast VLAN mv1 DAS 3626 admini create mld_snoop multicast _vlan mvl 2 Command create mld_snooping multicast vlan mv1 2 Success DAS 3626 admin config mid_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to configure the parameter of the specific MLD multicast VLAN Syntax config mld_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete member_port lt portlist gt tag_member_port lt portlist gt source_port lt portlist gt state enable disable replace_source_ip lt ipv6addr gt Description This command allows you to add member ports add tag_member ports and add source ports to the port list The member port will automatically become the untagged member of the MLD multicast VLAN the tag_member_port and the source port will automatically become the tagged member of the MLD multicast VLAN To c
236. host utilizes the TACACS protocol e radius Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol port lt int 1 65535 gt Enter a number between 7 and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication protocol on a server host The default port number is 49 for TACACS XTACACS TACACS servers and 1812 and 1813 for RADIUS servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher security key lt key_string 254 gt Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS or RADIUS server only Specify an alphanumeric string up to 254 characters or choose none timeout lt int 1 255 gt Enter the time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request The default value is 5 seconds retransmit lt int 1 255 gt Enter the value in the retransmit field to change how many times the device will resend an authentication request when the server does not respond This field is inoperable for the TACACS protocol Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure a TACACS authentication server host with port number 4321 a timeout value of 12 seconds and a retransmit count of 4 DAS 3626 admini config authen server host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs port 4321 timeout 12 retransmit 4 Command config authen server host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs port 4321 timeout 12 retransmit 4 Success DAS 3626 adm
237. ible terminal mode to access and control the Switch All of the screens are identical whether accessed from the console port or from a Telnet interface After the Switch reboots and users have logged in the console looks like this DAS 3626 VDSL2 Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 1 02 B018 Copyright C 2008 D Link Corporation All rights reserved UserName Commands are entered at the command prompt DAS 3626 admin There are a number of helpful features included in the CLI Entering the command will display a list of all of the top level commands DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual cable diag ports cfm linktrace cfm loopback clear clear address binding dhcp snoop binding entry ports clear arptable clear attack_log clear cfm pkt_cnt clear counters clear ethernet_oam ports clear fdb clear historical_counters ports clear igmp snooping data_driven_ group clear igmp snooping statistic counter clear log clear mac_based_access control auth_mac clear mld_ snooping data_driven_group clear mld_ snooping statistic counter clear port _security entry clear vlan_counter statistics Quit R Next Page Next Entry All Figure 2 2 The Command When users enter a command without its required parameters the CLI will prompt users with a Next possible completions message DAS 3626 admin config account Command config account Next possible completions lt username
238. ic query messages including those sent in response to leave group messages You might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the last member of a group state If the state is enable it allows the switch to be selected as a IGMP Querier sends IGMP query packets It the state is disabled then the switch can not play the role as a querier Note that if the Layer 3 router connected to the switch provide only the IGMP proxy function but not provide the mutlicast routing function then this state must be configured as disabled Otherwise if the Layer 3 router is not selected as the querier it will not send the IGMP query packet Since it will not also send the multicast routing protocol packet the port will be timed out as a router port version The version of the IGMP Query sent by the switch 162 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config igmp_snooping querier Restrictions Only Administrator or Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the IGMP snooping querier DAS 3626 admin config igmp_snooping querier vlan default query interval 125 state enable Command config igmp_snooping querier vlan default query_interval 125 state enable Success DAS 3626 admin config router_ports Purpose Used to configure ports as router ports Syntax config router_ports vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt D
239. ically so it is not necessary to change the ipif settings ipv6address IPv6 network address The address should specify a host address and length of network prefix There can be multiple v6 addresses defined on an interface Thus as a new address is defined it is added on this ipif Ipv6 state Allows users to enable IPv6 address on the IP interface ipv4 state Allows users to enable IPv4 address on the IP interface Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the IP interface System DAS 3626 admin config ipif System ipaddress 10 48 74 122 8 Command config ipif System ipaddress 10 48 74 122 8 Success DAS 3626 admin show ipif Purpose Used to display the configuration of an IP interface on the Switch Syntax show ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt Description This command is used to display the configuration of an IP interface on the Switch Parameters lt ipif_name 12 gt The name created for the IP interface Restrictions None 45 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display IP interface settings DAS 3626 admin tshow ipif System Command show ipif System IP Interface VLAN Name System default Interface Admin State Enabled Link Status IPv4 Address IPv4 State DAS 3626 admin LinkUp 10 24 73 21 8 Manual Primary Enabled enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_aut
240. icast_vlan Purpose Used to delete an IGMP Muticast VLAN Syntax delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command allows you to delete an IGMP Multicast VLAN Parameters vlan_name The name of the multicast VLAN to be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete an IGMP Multicast VLAN DAS 3626 admin delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1 Command delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1 Success DAS 3626 admin 178 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to enable disable the IGMP Multicast VLAN function enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan This command controls the IGMP Multicast VLAN function The IGMP Multicast VLAN will take effect when igmp snooping multicast vlan is enabled By default the IGMP Multicast VLAN is in a disabled state None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable IGMP Multicast VLAN DAS 3626 admini enable igmp snooping multicast_vlan Command enable igmp snooping multicast vlan Success DAS 3626 admin show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to show the informa
241. ication server hosts previously created on the Switch The following parameters are displayed IP Address The IP address of the authentication server host Protocol The protocol used by the server host Possible results will include TACACS XTACACS TACACS or RADIUS Port The virtual port number on the server host The default value is 49 Timeout The time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request Retransmit The value in the retransmit field denotes how many times the device will resend an authentication request when the TACACS server does not respond This field is inoperable for the tacacs protocol Key Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS server only Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To view authentication server hosts currently set on the Switch 377 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show authen server host Command show authen server host IP Address Protocol Port Timeout Retransmit Key 10 53 13 94 TACACS Total Entries 1 DAS 3626 admin create authen server_group Purpose Used to create a user defined authentication server group Syntax create authen server_group lt string 15 gt Description This command will create an authentication server group A server group is a technique used to group TACA
242. ication to access the Switch method_list_name Enter a previously implemented method list name defined by the user create authen_enable The user may add one or a combination of up to four 4 of the following authentication methods to this method list e tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server server_group lt string 15 gt Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch local_enable Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch The local enable password of the device can be configured using the config admin local_password command none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the administration level privileges on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 362 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual
243. ict fuzzy Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 290 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config safeguard_engine Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage To configure ARP storm control for system config safeguard_engine state enable disable utilization rising lt value 20 100 gt falling lt value 20 100 gt trap_log enable disable mode strict fuzzy This command is used to configure Safeguard Engine to minimize the effects of an ARP storm state enable disable Select the running state of the Safeguard Engine function as enable or disable utilization Select this option to trigger the Safeguard Engine function to enable based on the following determinates rising lt value 20 100 gt The user can set a percentage value of the rising CPU utilization which will trigger the Safeguard Engine function Once the CPU utilization rises to this percentage the Safeguard Engine mechanism will initiate falling lt value 20 100 gt The user can set a percentage value of the falling CPU utilization which will trigger the Safeguard Engine function to cease Once the CPU utilization falls to this percentage the Safeguard Engine mechanism will shut down trap_log enable disable Choose whether to enable or disable the sending of messages to the device s SNMP agent and switch log once the Safegu
244. ified frame header fields Specific values for the rules are entered using the config access_profile command below 398 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create access_profile Parameters profile_id lt value 1 1024 gt Sets the relative priority for the profile Priority is set relative to other profiles where the lowest profile ID has the highest priority The user may enter a profile ID number between 1 1024 yet remember only 1024 access profiles can be created on the Switch profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Specifies the name of the profile The maximum length is 32 characters ethernet Specifies that the Switch will examine the layer 2 part of each packet header e vlan Specifies that the Switch will examine the VLAN part of each packet header source_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt Specifies a MAC address mask for the source MAC address This mask is entered in a hexadecimal format e destination_mac lt macmask 000000000000 fffffffffff gt Specifies a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address e 802 1p Specifies that the Switch will examine the 802 1p priority value in the frame s header ethernet_type Specifies that the Switch will examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header Ipv4 Specifies that the Switch will examine the IP address in each frame s header vlan Specifies a VLAN mask source_ip_mask lt n
245. ile pages are 0 b0 epaye O a ___ Dsplayete remaining pages witout pausing baton pagos DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Basic SwitcH CommMaANDS The basic switch commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table owen OOOO sows OOO ows OOOO SS owes OOOO config serial_port baud_rate 9600 19200 38400 115200 auto_logout never 2_minutes 5_minutes 10_minutes 15_ minutes asstiecipagng OOOO aeee we C ea Eeo C Each command is listed in detail in the following sections DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create account Purpose Used to create user accounts Syntax create account admin operator user lt username 15 gt Description This command is used to create user accounts that consist of a username of 1 to 15 characters and a password of 0 to 15 characters Up to 8 user accounts can be created Parameters admin operator user lt username 15 gt Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Usernames can be between 1 and 15 characters Passwords can be between 0 and 15 characters Example usage To create an administrator level user account with the username dlink DAS 3626 admin create account admin dlink Command create account admin dlink Enter a case sensitive new password Enter the new password again for
246. ilename of the certificate file users wish to download keyfilename lt path_filename 64 gt Enter the path and the filename of the key exchange file users wish to download path_filename Private key file path respect to tftp server root path and input characters max to 64 octets Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To download a certificate file and key file to the Switch DAS 3626 admin DAS 3626 admin download ssl certificate 10 55 47 1 certfilename cert der keyfilename pkey der Command download ssl certificate 10 55 47 1 certfilename cert der keyfilename pkey der Success DAS 3626 admin 302 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual SSH Commanps The steps required to use the Secure Shell SSH protocol for secure communication between a remote PC the SSH Client and the Switch the SSH Server are as follows Create a user account with admin level access using the create account admin lt username gt lt password gt command This is identical to creating any other admin lever user account on the Switch including specifying a password This password is used to login to the Switch once secure communication has been established using the SSH protocol Configure the user account to use a specified authorization method to identify users that are allowed to establish SSH connections with the Switch using the config ssh authmode
247. in 375 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to delete a user defined authentication server host Syntax delete authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius Description This command is used to delete a user defined authentication server host previously created on the Switch Parameters server_host lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the remote server host to be deleted protocol The protocol used by the server host the user wishes to delete The user may choose one of the following e tacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol e xtacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol e tacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol e radius Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol 376 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a user defined TACACS authentication server host DAS 3626 admini delete authen server host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs Command delete authen server host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs Success DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to view a user defined authentication server host Syntax show authen server_host Description This command is used to view user defined authent
248. incoming packet on the previously specified port replace_tos_precedence_with lt value 0 7 gt Specifies the packets that match the access profile and that tos precedence values will be changed by the switch rx_rate Specifies that one of the parameters below no_limit or lt value 1 15624 gt will be applied to the rate at which the above specified ports will be allowed to receive packets e no_limit Specifies that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above specified ports lt value 1 15624 gt Specifies the packet limit in 64Kbps that the above ports will be allowed to receive deny Specifies the rule will deny access for incoming packets on the previously specified port mirror Specifies the packets that match the access profile copies it and sends the copied one to the mirror port time_range Specifies the time_range profile that has been associated with the ACL entries delete access_id lt value 1 1024 gt Use this to remove a previously created access rule of a profile ID For information on number of rules that can be created for a given port lease see the introduction to this chapter Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the access profile with the profile ID of 1 to filter frames on port 7 that have IP addresses in the range between 10 42 73 0 to 10 42 73 255 DAS 3626 admini config acc
249. index 1 4 gt all Description This command is used to remove a syslog host that has been previously configured from the Switch Parameters lt index 1 4 gt Specifies that the command will be applied to an index of hosts There are four available indexes numbered 1 through 4 all Specifies that the command will be applied to all hosts Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a previously configured syslog host DAS 3626 admin delete syslog host 4 Command delete syslog host 4 Success DAS 3626 admin show syslog host Purpose Used to display the syslog hosts currently configured on the Switch Syntax show syslog host lt index 1 4 gt Description This command is used to display the syslog hosts that are currently configured on the Switch Parameters lt index 1 4 gt Specifies that the command will be applied to an index of hosts There are four available indexes numbered 1 through 4 Restrictions None Example usage 461 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual To show Syslog host information DAS 3626 admin tshow syslog host Command show syslog host Syslog Global State Disabled Host Id Host IP Address Severity Facility UDP port Status Disabled 10 40 2 3 Local0 514 Disabled 10 21 13 1 Local0 514 Disabled Total Entries 3 DAS 3626 admin config log_save_timing Purpose Used to
250. ined in the CLI Configuration and management of the VDSL Switch via the Web based management agent is discussed in the User Manual This manual provides a reference for all of the commands contained in the CLI for the DAS 3626 Examples present in this manual may refer to either member of this series and may show different port counts but are universal to this series of switches unless otherwise stated Configuration and management of the VDSL Switch via the Web based management agent is discussed in the User Guide NOTE For the remainder of this manual the DAS 3626 switches will be referred to as simply the Switch or the DAS 3600 Series Accessing the Switch via the Serial Port The Switch s serial port s default settings are as follows e 115200 baud e no parity e 8 data bits e 1 stop bit A computer running a terminal emulation program capable of emulating a VT 100 terminal and a serial port configured as above is then connected to the Switch s serial port via an RS 232 DB 9 cable With the serial port properly connected to a management computer the following screen should be visible If this screen does not appear try pressing Ctrl r to refresh the console screen DAS 3626 VDSL2 Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 1 00 B042 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved UserName There is no initial username or password Just press the Enter key twice to display the CLI input cursor DAS 3626
251. ing to the MAC destination address The Switch will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a unicast MAC FDB entry DAS 3626 admin tcreate fdb default 00 00 00 00 01 02 port 5 Command create fdb default 00 00 00 00 01 02 port 5 Success DAS 3626 admin 247 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create multicast_fdb Purpose Used to create a static entry to the multicast MAC address forwarding table database Syntax create multicast_fdb lt vian_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt Description This command will make an entry into the Switch s multicast MAC address forwarding database Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt macaddr gt The MAC address that will be added to the forwarding table Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create multicast MAC forwarding DAS 3626 admin create multicast fdb default 01 00 00 00 00 01 Command create multicast fdb default 01 00 00 00 00 01 Success DAS 3626 admin config multicast_fdb Purpose Used to configure the Switch s multicast MAC address forwarding database Syntax config multicast_fdb lt vlan_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command con
252. inistrator level users can issue this command To create an SNMP view DAS 3626 admini create snmp view dlinkview 1 3 6 view_type included Command create snmp view dlinkview 1 3 6 view_type included Success DAS 3626 admin delete snmp view Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to remove an SNMP view entry previously created on the Switch delete snmp view lt view_name 32 gt all lt oid gt This command is used to remove an SNMP view previously created on the Switch lt view_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that identifies the SNMP view to be deleted all Specifies that all of the SNMP views on the Switch will be deleted lt oid gt The object ID that identifies an object tree MIB tree that will be deleted from the Switch Only Administrator level users can issue this command To delete a previously configured SNMP view from the Switch DAS 3626 admin delete snmp view dlinkview all Command delete snmp view dlinkview all Success DAS 3626 admin 90 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show snmp view Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display an SNMP view previously created on the Switch show snmp view lt view_name 32 gt This command is used to display an SNMP view previously created on the Switch lt view_name 32 gt
253. inktrace DAS 3626 admin delete cfm linktrace mep mep1 Command delete cfm linktrace mep mep1 Success DAS 3626 admin config cfm ccm_fwd Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage This command is used to configure CCM PDUs forwarding mode config cfm ccm_fwd software hardware This coommand is for test purposes For ordinary user it is not suggested to use this command By default the CCM message is handled and forwarded by software The software can handle the packet based on behaviour defined by the standard Under a strict environment there may be substantial amount of CCM packets and it will consume substantial amount of CPU resource To meet the performance requirement the handling of CCM can be changed to hardware mode This function is especially useful for domain s intermediate device since they only have MIPS Note that this command can only be used under assistance of technical personnel software Specifies to forward by software hardware Specifies to forward by hardware Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the CFM ccm forwarding mode DAS 3626 admini config cfm ccm_fwd_mode hardware Command config cfm ccm_fwd_mode hardware Success DAS 3626 admin 269 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual cfm loopback Purpose Used to show MEPs and MIPs created on a port Syn
254. instance configuration for instance 0 the internal CIST on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show stp instance 0 Command show stp instance 0 STP Instance Settings Instance Type Instance Status Enabled Instance Priority 32768 Bridge Priority 32768 SYS ID Ext STP Instance Operational Status Designated Root Bridge 4096 00 11 95 AA 41 00 External Root Cost 200004 Regional Root Bridge 32768 00 01 02 03 04 00 Internal Root Cost 0 Designated Bridge 32768 00 50 BA 97 D9 56 Root Port 7 Max Age 20 Forward Delay gt 15 Last Topology Change 0 Topology Changes Count DAS 3626 admin show stp mst_config_id Purpose Used to display the MSTP configuration identification Syntax show stp mst_config_id Description This command displays the Switch s current MSTP configuration identification Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the MSTP configuration identification currently set on the Switch 245 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show stp mst_config id Command show stp mst_config id Current MST Configuration Identification Configuration Name 00 53 13 1A 33 24 Revision Level 0 Vid list DAS 3626 admin 246 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual FORWARDING DATABASE COMMANDS The layer 2 forwarding database commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the a
255. ion obligates the user to configure the time_interval field as well which will provide packet count samplings from the Switch s chip to determine if a Packet Storm is occurring threshold lt value 0 255000 gt The upper threshold at which the specified traffic control is switched on The lt va ue gt is the number of broadcast multicast unicast packets in packets per second pps received by the Switch that will trigger the storm traffic control measures The default setting is 137072 time_interval The Interval will set the time between Multicast and Broadcast packet counts sent from the Switch s chip to the Traffic Control function These packet counts are the determining factor in deciding when incoming packets exceed the Threshold value value 5 30 The Interval may be set between 5 and 30 seconds with the default setting of 5 seconds countdown The countdown timer is set to determine the amount of time in minutes that the Switch will wait before shutting down the port that is experiencing a traffic storm The switch will shutdown the port only if the traffic level exceeds the configured threshold all the time during this countdown period This parameter is only useful for ports configured as shutdown in the action field of this command and therefore will not operate for Hardware based Traffic Control implementations e value 0 0 is the default setting for this field and 0 will denote that the port will never shutd
256. ion will be included in the display err_disabled Use this to list disabled ports including connection status and reason for being disabled Restrictions None Example usage To display the configuration of all ports on a standalone switch DAS 3626 admin show ports Command show ports Port Port Settings Connection Address Speed Duplex FlowCtrl Speed Duplex FlowCtrl Learning Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled VDSL None Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled VDSL None Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Notes F indicates fiber medium and C indicates copper medium in a combo port DAS 3626 admin Example usage To display the configuration of all ports on a standalone switch with description 63 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show ports description Command show ports description Port Port Settings Connection Address Speed Duplex FlowCtrl Speed Duplex FlowCtrl Learning Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Description Enabled Auto Disabled Link Down Enabled Description Enabled Auto Disabled VDSL None
257. iority within the profile_id This access_id may be used later if users want to remove the individual rule from the profile The ip parameter instructs the Switch that this new rule will be applied to the IP addresses contained within each frame s header source_ip tells the Switch that this rule will apply to the source IP addresses in each frame s header The IP address 10 42 73 1 will be combined with the source_ip_mask 255 255 255 0 to give the IP address 10 42 73 0 for any source IP address between 10 42 73 0 to 10 42 73 255 Finally the restricted port port number 7 is specified Due to a chipset limitation the Switch supports a maximum of twelve access profiles The rules used to define the access profiles are limited to a total of 1536 rules for the Switch create access_profile Purpose Used to create an access profile on the Switch and to define which parts of each incoming frame s header the Switch will examine Masks can be entered that will be combined with the values the Switch finds in the specified frame header fields Specific values for the rules are entered using the create access_profile command below Syntax create access_profile profile_id lt value 1 1024 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt ethernet vlan mask lt hex 0x0 0xOfff gt source_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt destination_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt 802 1p ethernet_type 1 ipv4 vlan mask lt hex 0x0 OxOfff g
258. ipv4 2 Command delete mcast_ filter profile profile id ipv4 2 Success DAS 3626 admini delete mcast_filter profile profile _id ipv6 2 Command delete mcast_ filter profile profile id ipv6 2 Success DAS 3626 admin 56 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name Purpose This command deletes a multicast profile name Syntax delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name ipv4 ipv6 lt name 1 32 gt Description This command deletes a multicast profile Parameters profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Name of the profile Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a multicast filter profile profile name DAS 3626 admini delete mcast_filter profile profile name ipv4 DG Command delete mcast_filter_ profile profile name ipv4 DG Success DAS 3626 admini delete mcast_filter profile profile _id ipv6 RG Command delete mcast_ filter profile profile id ipv6 RG Success DAS 3626 admin show mcast_filter_profile Purpose This command displays the defined multicast address profiles Syntax show mceast_filter_profile ipv4 ipv6 profile_id lt value 1 60 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Description This command displays the defined multicast address profiles Parameters profile_id ID of the profile if not specified all profiles will be displayed profile_name lt name 1 32 gt
259. itch storm_cleared A notification will be generated and sent when a packet storm has been cleared by the Switch both A notification will be generated and sent when a packet storm has been detected and cleared by the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure notifications to be sent when a packet storm control has been detected and cleared by the Switch DAS 3626 admin config traffic trap both Command config traffic trap both Success DAS 3626 admin 289 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual SAFEGUARD ENGINE COMMANDS Periodically malicious hosts on the network will attack the Switch by utilizing packet flooding ARP Storm or other methods These attacks may increase the CPU utilization beyond its capability To alleviate this problem the Safeguard Engine function was added to the Switch s software The Safeguard Engine can help the overall operability of the Switch by minimizing the workload of the Switch while the attack is ongoing thus making it capable to forward essential packets over its network in a limited bandwidth When the Switch either a receives too many packets to process or b exerts too much memory it will enter an Exhausted mode When in this mode the Switch will perform the following tasks to minimize the CPU usage a It will limit bandwidth of receiving ARP packets b It wi
260. itch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the jumbo frame DAS 3626 admin disable jumbo frame Command disable jumbo_frame Success DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to show the status of the jumbo frame function on the Switch Syntax show jumbo_frame Description This command will show the status of the jumbo frame function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the jumbo frame status currently configured on the Switch DAS 3626 admini show jumbo frame Command show jumbo frame Jumbo Frame State Disabled Maximum Frame Size 1536 Bytes DAS 3626 admin 65 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual ARP Commanps The ARP commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table 66 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters create arpentry lt ipaddr gt lt macaddr gt config arpentry lt ipaddr gt lt macaddr gt delete arpentry lt ipaddr gt all show arpentry ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt static config arp_aging time lt value 0 65535 gt 67 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters 68 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual
261. ively Parameters lt class_id 0 7 gt This specifies which of the eight hardware priority queues the config scheduling command will apply to The eight hardware priority queues are identified by number from 0 to 7 with the 0 queue being the lowest priority weight lt value 1 255 gt Using weighted fair algorithm to handle packets in priority queues Means each queue will operate based on its setting of max_packet Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each queue DAS 3626 admin tconfig scheduling 3 strict Command config scheduling 3 strict Success DAS 3626 admin 277 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config scheduling mechanism Purpose Used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each COS queue Syntax config scheduling _mechanism strict wrr Description This command is used to specify how the switch handles packets in priority queues Parameters strict The highest queue first process That is the highest queue should be finished at first wrr Using weighted roundrobin algorithm to handle packets in priority queues Restrictions Only Administrator and Operation level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each COS queue DAS 3626 admini config scheduling mechanism strict Com
262. ket is enabled it will be processed based on the MLD snooping function If the MLD snooping for the classified VLAN of this MLD packet is disabled then it will check whether to be processed by the MLD multicast VLAN function There are some cases when an MLD packet can be processed by the MLD multicast VLAN If there are no profiles system wide and there is only one MLD multicast VLAN then this MLD packet will be associated with only this MLD multicast VLAN However if the packet is a tagged packet the packet will be matched against the profile on this VLAN If matched the packet will be associated with this VLAN Otherwise the packet is an unmatched packet Otherwise if the packet is an untagged packet the packet will be matched against profiles on all MLD multicast VLANs If it matches profiles on one of the MLD multicast VLANs the packets will be associated with this VLAN If it does not match profiles on any VLANs then the packet is an umatched packet If the packet is an unmatched packet it will not be processed by the MLD Multicast VLAN Instead it will be processed based on the forwarding mode for unmatched packets and the classified VLAN of this packet Note The same profile can not be overlapped in different multicast VLANs if these multicast VLANs have an overlapping portlist Multiple profiles can be added to a multicast VLAN Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured each multi
263. l NTP commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config sntp primary lt ipaddr gt secondary lt ipaddr gt poll interval lt int 30 99999 gt show sntp enable sntp disable sntp config time lt date ddmmmyyyy gt lt time hh mm ss gt operator hour lt gmt_hour 0 13 gt min lt minute 0 59 gt disable repeating s_week lt start_week 1 4 last gt s_day lt start_day sun sat gt s_mth lt start_mth 1 12 gt s_time lt start_time hh mm gt e_week lt end_week 1 4 last gt e day lt end_day sun sat gt e_mth lt end_mth 1 12 gt e_time lt end_time hh mm gt offset 30 60 90 120 annual s_date lt start_date 1 31 gt s_ mth lt start_mth 1 12 gt s_ time lt start_time hh mm gt e_date lt end_date 1 31 gt e mth lt end_mth 1 12 gt e_time lt end_time hh mm gt offset 30 60 90 120 awm S S Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config dst config sntp Purpose Used to setup SNTP service Syntax config sntp primary lt ipaddr gt secondary lt ipaddr gt poll interval lt int 30 99999 gt Description This command is used to configure SNTP service from an SNTP server SNTP must be enabled for this command to function See enable sntp Parameters primary This is the primary server from which the SNTP information will be taken lt
264. l be processed based on IGMP snooping function If the IGMP snooping for the classified VLAN of this IGMP packet is disabled then it will be checked whether to be processed by the IGMP Multicast VLAN function There are some cases when an IGMP packet can be processed by IGMP Multicast VLAN If there are no profiles systemwise and there is only one IGMP Multicast VLAN then this IGMP packet will be associated with this only IGMP Multicast VLAN If the packet is a tagged packet the packet will be matched against the profile on this VLAN If matched the packet will be associated with this VLAN Otherwise the packet is an unmatched packet If the packet is an untagged packet the packet will be matched against profiles on all IGMP Multicast VLANs If it matches profiles on one of the IGMP Multicast VLAN the packet will be associated with this VLAN If it does not match profiles on any VLANs then the packet is an umatched packet If the packet is an unmatched packet it will not be processed by the IGMP Multicast VLAN Instead it will be processed based on the forwarding mode for unmatched packets and the classified VLAN of this packet Note The same profile can not be overlapped in different IGMP Multicast VLANs if these IGMP Multicast VLANs have an overlapping portlist Multiple profiles can be added to a multicast VLAN Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured each multicast VLAN is given a name th
265. l users can issue this command Enabling the NetBIOS filter will create one access profile and one access rules per port DSAP FO SASP FO Example usage To configure the extensive NetBIOS state DAS 3626 admini config filter extensive _netbios 1 10 state enable Command config filter extensive netbios 1 10 state enable Success DAS 3626 admin show filter extensive_netbios Purpose Used to display the switch settings to filter NetBIOS packets from specified ports Syntax show filter extensive_netbios Description This command will display the switch settings to filter NetBIOS packets from the specified ports Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the extensive NetBIOS filter status DAS 3626 admin show filter extensive _netbios Command show filter extensive_netbios Enabled Ports 1 3 DAS 3626 admin 395 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Access Controt List ACL Commanps The Switch implements Access Control Lists that enable the Switch to deny network access to specific devices or device groups based on IP settings and MAC address The access profile commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Note The ACL command set has been changed for the Release III firmware In particular note the different role of th
266. l users can issue this command To create a static group 226 1 1 1 for VID 1 DAS 3626 admini create igmp snooping static_group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 Command create igmp snooping static group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 Success DAS 3626 admin 171 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete igmp_snooping static_group Purpose Used to delete the current IGMP snooping static group on the Switch Syntax delete igmp_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vianid_list gt lt ipaddr gt Description This command is used to delete an IGMP snooping static group will not affect the IGMP snooping dynamic member ports of a group Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to delete IGMP snooping static group information lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to delete IGMP snooping static group information lt jpaddr gt The static group address for which to delete IGMP snooping static group information Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a static group 226 1 1 1 on VID 1 DAS 3626 admini delete igmp snooping static_group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 Command delete igmp snooping static group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 Success DAS 3626 admin config igmp_snooping static_group Purpose Used to configure the current IGMP snooping static group on the Switch Syntax c
267. le Description This command is used to enable disable VDSL trellis coding Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed TrellisCoding To config VDSL trellis coding enable enable VDSL trellis coding disable disable VDSL trellis coding Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl trellis coding DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default TrellisCoding enable Command config vdsl profile name default TrellisCoding enable Success DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile RateAdaptive Purpose Used to config vdsl profile rate adaptive method Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt RateAdaptive fix rate adaptive Description This command is used to config VDSL rate adaptive Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed RateAdaptive To config VDSL profile rate adaptive method fix The vdsl line will only train at the maximum data rate specified If synchronization fails the channel will keep attempting to train at the fixed rate indefinitely rate adaptive Synchronization will occur within the margin between maximum and minimum data rates specified Depend online condition Restrictions Only
268. le permit Specifies that the packet that match the addresses defined in the profiles will be permitted The default mode is permit deny Specifies that the packet that match the addresses defined in the profiles will be denied Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config port 1 3 to set the multicast address profile 2 DAS 3626 admini config limited_multicast_addr ports 1 3 ipv4 add profile id 2 Command config limited_multicast addr ports 1 3 ipv4 add profile id 2 Success DAS 3626 admin show limited_multicast_addr ports Purpose Used to show per port Limited IP multicast address range Syntax show limited_multicast_addr ipv4 ipv6 ports lt portlist gt vianid lt vlanid_list gt Description This command allows you to show multicast address range by ports When the function is configured on a port it limits the multicast groups operated by the IGMP or MLD snooping function and layer 3 function Parameters lt portlist gt A range of ports to show the limited multicast address configuration lt vianid_list gt range of VLAN IDs to show the multicast address configuration Restrictions None Example usage To show a limited multicast address range 58 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show limited _multicast_addr ipv4 ports 1 3 Command show limited multicast addr ipv4 ports 1
269. le usage To view MLD snooping statistic on VID 1 DAS 3626 admini show mld _ snooping statistic counter vlanid 1 Command show mld_snooping statistic counter vlanid 1 default Group Number Receive Statistics Query MLD v1 Query MLD v2 Query Total Dropped By Rate Limitation Dropped By Multicast VLAN Report amp Done MLD v1 Report MLD v2 Report MLD v1 Done Total Dropped By Rate Limitation Dropped By Max Group Limitation Dropped By Group Filter Dropped By Multicast VLAN Transmit Statistics Query MLD v1 Query MLD v2 Query Total Report amp Done MLD v1 Report MLD v2 Report MLD v1 Done Total Total Entries DAS 3626 admin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 202 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual clear mld_snooping statistic counter Purpose Used to clear the current MLD snooping statistic on the Switch Syntax clear mld_snooping statistic counter Description This command is used to clear all MLD snooping statistic counters Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear MLD snooping statistic counter DAS 3626 admin clear mld_snooping statistic counter Command clear mld_snooping statistic counter Success DAS 3626 admin 203 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Port MIRRORING CommMaANnps The port mirroring commands in the Command Line Interface CLI
270. lization cpu Command show utilization cpu CPU Utilization DAS 3626 admin show utilization dram Purpose Used to display real time utilization statistics for the DRAM Syntax show utilization dram Description This command will display the real time utilization statistics for the DRAM on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None To display the current utilization of DRAM DAS 3626 admin show utilization dram Command show utilization dram DRAM utilization Total DRAM 131072 Used DRAM 123879 Utilization 94 3 ee Quit HaNXes i Next Page js Previous Page fy Refresh show utilization flash Purpose Used to display real time utilization statistics for the flash memory Syntax show utilization flash Description This command will display the real time utilization statistics for the flash memory on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None To display the current utilization of flash DAS 3626 admin show utilization flash Command show utilization flash FLASH Memory Utilization Total FLASH Used FLASH Utilization oe Quit HaNes i Next Page js Previous Page fy Refresh 450 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual clear counters Purpose Used to clear the Switch s statistics counters Syntax clear counters ports lt portlist gt Description This command will clear the counters used by the Switch to compile statistics Parameters lt portlist gt
271. ll limit the bandwidth of IP packets received by the Switch IP packets may also be limited by the Switch by configuring only certain IP addresses to be accepted This method can be accomplished through the CPU Interface Filtering mechanism explained in the previous section Once the user configures these acceptable IP addresses other packets containing different IP addresses will be dropped by the Switch thus limiting the bandwidth of IP packets To keep the process moving fast be sure not to add many conditions on which to accept these acceptable IP addresses and their packets this limiting the CPU utilization Once in Exhausted mode the packet flow will decrease by half of the level that caused the Switch to enter Exhausted mode After the packet flow has stabilized the rate will initially increase by 25 and then return to a normal packet flow NOTICE When the Safeguard Engine is enabled the Switch will allot bandwidth to various traffic 5 flows ARP IP using the FFP Fast Filter Processor metering table to control the CPU utilization and a traffic This may limit the speed of routing traffic over the network The Safeguard Engine commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config safeguard_engine state enable disable utilization rising lt value 20 100 gt falling lt value 20 100 gt trap_log enable disable mode str
272. lt domain_name 32 gt hostname_IP lt domain_name 32 gt lt ipaddr gt password publickey Description This command is used to configure the SSH user authentication method Parameters lt username 15 gt Enter a username of no more than 15 characters to identify the SSH user authmode Specifies the authentication mode of the SSH user wishing to log on to the Switch The administrator may choose between hostbased This parameter should be chosen if the user wishes to use a remote SSH server for authentication purposes Choosing this parameter requires the user to input the following information to identify the SSH user e hostname lt domain_name 32 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters identifying the remote SSH user e hostname_IP lt domain_name 32 gt lt ipaddr gt Enter the hostname and the corresponding IP address of the SSH user password This parameter should be chosen to use an administrator defined password for authentication publickey This parameter should be chosen to use the publickey on a SSH server for authentication Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the SSH user DAS 3626 admin config ssh user Trinity authmode password Command config ssh user Trinity authmode password Success DAS 3626 admin 323 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show ssh user authm
273. lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt Description This command is used to config VDSL DPBO value Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed DPBOValues config DPBO Downstream Power Back Off value DPBOESEL Downstream Power Back Off E side Electrical Length DPBOESCMA Downstream Power Back Off E side Cable Model A DPBOESCMB Downstream Power Back Off E side Cable Model B DPBOESCMC Downstream Power Back Off E side Cable Model C DPBOMUS Downstream Power Back Off Minimum Usable Signal DPBOFMIN Downstream Power Back Off span Minimum Frequency DPBOFMAX Downstream Power Back Off span maximum frequency DPBOEPSD Downstream Power Back Off assumed Exchange PSD mask Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl DPBO value DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default DPBOValues DPBOESEL 30 Command config vdsl profile name default DPBOValues DPBOESEL 30 Success DAS 3626 admin 427 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile TrellisCoding Purpose Used to config vdsl profile TrellisCoding Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt TrellisCoding disable enab
274. lt name 32 gt Description This command is used to display the protocols defined in protocol groups Parameters group _id The id of protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 characters Restrictions None Example usage To display the protocol group ID 1 DAS 3626 admin show dotlv_protocol_ group group_id 1 Command show dotlv_protocol_ group group _id 1 Protocol Group ID Protocol Group Name Frame Type Protocol Value General Group EthernetII Total Entries DAS 3626 admin 145 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config port dot1v Purpose Assign the VLAN for untagged packets ingress from the portlist based on the protocol group configured Syntax config port dot1v ports lt portlist gt all add protocol_group group_id lt id gt group_name lt name 32 gt vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt id 1 16 gt priority lt value 0 7 gt delete protocol_group group_id lt id 1 16 gt all Description This command is used to assign the VLAN for untagged packets ingress from the portlist based on the protocol group configured This assignment can be removed by using delete protocol_ group option When priority is not specified in the command the port default prority will be the priority for those untagged packets classified by the protocol vian Parameters lt portlist gt Spe
275. lt portlist gt vianid lt vlanid_list gt This command is used to display the max number of multicast groups that a port can join lt portlist gt A range of ports to display the max number of multicast groups lt vianid_list gt A range of VLAN IDs to display the max number of multicast groups None To display the maximum number of multicast groups DAS 3626 admini show max_mcast_group ipv4 ports 1 3 Command show max_mcast_ group ipv4 ports 1 3 Total Entries DAS 3626 admin 60 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual SwitcH Port CommMaANDS The switch port commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config ports lt portlist gt all medium_type fiber copper speed auto 10_half 10_full 100_half 100_full 1000_full master slave flow_control enable disable learning enable disable state enable disable description lt desc 1 32 gt clear_description show ports lt portlist gt description err_disabled enable jumbo_frame show jumbo_frame disable jumbo_frame Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 61 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to configure the Switch s port settings Syntax config ports lt portlist gt all medium_typ
276. lty network card Thus switch throughput problems will arise and consequently affect the overall performance of the switch network To help rectify this packet storm the Switch will monitor and control the situation The packet storm is monitored to determine if too many packets are flooding the network based on the threshold level provided by the user Once a packet storm has been detected the Switch will drop packets coming into the Switch until the storm has subsided This method can be utilized by selecting the Drop option of the Action field in the window below The Switch will also scan and monitor packets coming into the Switch by monitoring the Switch s chip counter This method is only viable for Broadcast and Multicast storms because the chip only has counters for these two types of packets Once a storm has been detected that is once the packet threshold set below has been exceeded the Switch will shutdown the port to all incoming traffic with the exception of STP BPDU packets for a time period specified using the countdown field If this field times out and the packet storm continues the port will be placed in a Shutdown Forever mode which will produce a warning message to be sent to the Trap Receiver Once in Shutdown Forever mode one method of recovering this port is to manually recoup it using the Port Configuration window in the Administration folder and selecting the disabled port and returning it to an Enabled status To utilize
277. ly Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the Switch contact to MIS Department IT DAS 3626 admini config snmp system_contact MIS Department II Command config snmp system_contact MIS Department II Success DAS 3626 admin config snmp system_location Purpose Used to enter a description of the location of the Switch Syntax config snmp system_location lt sw_location gt Description This command is used to enter a description of the location of the Switch A maximum of 255 characters can be used Parameters lt sw_location gt A maximum of 255 characters is allowed A NULL string is accepted if there is no location desired Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the Switch location for HQ 5F 117 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini config snmp system location HQ 5F Command config snmp system_location HQ 5F Success DAS 3626 admin config snmp system_name Purpose Used to configure the name for the Switch Syntax config snmp system_name lt sw_name gt Description This command is used to configure the name of the Switch Parameters lt sw_name gt A maximum of 255 characters is allowed A NULL string is accepted if no name is desired Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this comma
278. ly Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a protocol group DAS 3626 admini create dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 group_name General Group Command create dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 group_name General Group Success DAS 3626 admin 143 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config dot1v_protocol_group add protocol Purpose Add a protocol to a protocol group Syntax config dot1v_protocol_group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name gt add protocol ethernet_2 ieee802 3_ snap ieee802 3_ IIc lt protocol_value gt Description This command adds a protocol to a protocol group The selection of a protocol can be a pre defined protocol type or a user defined protocol Parameters group_id The id of protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 characters protocol_value The protoocl vlaue is used to identify a protocol of the frame type specified Depending on the frame type the octet string will have one of the following values The form of the input is 0x0 to Oxffff For ethernet ll this is a 16 bit 2 octet hex value Example Ipv4 is 800 ipv6 is 86dd ARP is 806 and so on For IEEE802 3 SNAP this is this is a 16 bit 2 octet hex value Example Ipv4 is 800 ipv6 is 86dd ARP is 806 and so on For IEEE802 3 LLC this is
279. mal user level privileges to Administrator level privileges on the Switch Syntax create authen_enable method_list_name lt string 15 gt Description This command is used to promote users with normal level privileges to Administrator level privileges using authentication methods on the Switch Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the Switch he or she must be authenticated by a method on the Switch to gain administrator privileges on the Switch which is defined by the Administrator A maximum of eight enable method lists can be implemented on the Switch Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given enable method list to create 356 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 357 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To create a user defined method list named Permit for promoting user privileges to Administrator privileges 358 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin create authen_enable method_list_name Permit Command create authen_enable method_list_name Permit Success DAS 3626 admin 359 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 360 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config authen_enable
280. mand config scheduling mechanism strict Success DAS 3626 admin show scheduling Purpose Used to display the currently configured traffic scheduling on the Switch Syntax show scheduling Description This command is used to display the current traffic scheduling parameters in use on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None 278 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the current scheduling configuration DAS 3626 admin show scheduling Command show scheduling QOS Output Scheduling Weight 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DAS 3626 admin show scheduling _mechanism Purpose Used to show the traffic scheduling mechanism Syntax show scheduling _mechanism Description This command is used to display the current traffic scheduling mechanism in use on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the scheduling mechanism 279 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show scheduling_mechanism Command show scheduling_mechanism QOS scheduling_mechanism CLASS ID Mechanism Class 0 Strict Class 1 Strict Class 2 Strict Class 3 Strict Class 4 Strict Class 5 Strict Class 6 Strict Class 7 Strict DAS 3626 admin config 802 1p user_priority Purpose Used to map the 802 1p user priority of an incoming packet to one of the eight hardware queues available on the Switch
281. me of a previously configured method list name e Priority Defines which order the method list protocols will be queried for authentication when a user attempts to log on to the Switch Priority ranges from 1 highest to 4 lowest Method Name Defines which security protocols are implemented per method list name Comment Defines the type of Method User defined Group refers to server group defined by the user Built in Group refers to the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS security protocols which are permanently set in the Switch Keyword refers to authentication using a technique INSTEAD of TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS which are local authentication through the user account on the Switch and none no authentication necessary to access any function on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To view the authentication login method list named Trinity DAS 3626 admin show authen_login method list_name Trinity Command show authen_login method_list_name Trinity Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment tacacs Built in Group tacacs Built in Group Darren User defined Group local Keyword DAS 3626 admin 354 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 355 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to create a user defined method list of authentication methods for promoting nor
282. members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the SNMP community string dlink 92 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin delete snmp community dlink Command delete snmp community dlink Success DAS 3626 admin 93 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 94 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show snmp community Purpose Used to display SNMP community strings configured on the Switch Syntax show snmp community lt community_string 32 gt Description This command is used to display SNMP community strings that are configured on the Switch Parameters lt community_string 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent 95 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show snmp community Restrictions None 96 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the currently entered SNMP community strings DAS 3626 admin show snmp community Command show snmp c
283. ment strategies It includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some security features v3 Specifies that the SNMP version 3 will be used SNMP v3 provides secure access to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network SNMP v3 adds e Message integrity ensures that packets have not been tampered with during transit e Authentication determines if an SNMP message is from a valid source e Encryption scrambles the contents of messages to prevent it being viewed by an unauthorized source noauth_nopriv Specifies that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager auth_nopriv Specifies that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager auth_priv Specifies that authorization will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger will be encrypted lt auth_string 32 gt An alphanumeric string used to authorize a remote SNMP manager to access the Switch s SNMP agent 102 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create snmp host Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an SNMP host to receive SNMP messages DAS 3626 admini create snmp host 10 48 74 100 v3 auth_priv p
284. ministrator and Operator level users can issue this command Other restrictions include e If the reset command is executed the modified command prompt will remain modified However the reset config reset system command will reset the command prompt to the original factory banner Example usage To modify the command prompt to AtYourService 28 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini config command prompt AtYourService Command config command_prompt AtYourService Success AtYourService admin5 config greeting _message Purpose Used to configure the login banner greeting message Syntax config greeting _message default Description This command is used to modify the login banner greeting message Parameters default If the user enters default to the modify banner command then the banner will be reset to the original factory banner To open the Banner Editor click enter after typing the config greeting message command Type the information to be displayed on the banner by using the commands described on the Banner Editor Quit without save Ctrl C Save and quit Ctrl W Move cursor Left Right Up Down Delete line Ctrl D Erase all settings Ctrl X Reload original settings Ctrl L 29 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini config command prompt AtYourService Command config command_prompt At
285. mit server_ip lt ipaddr gt client_mac lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command has two purposes to filter all DHCP server packets on the specified port s and to allow some DHCP server packets to be forwarded if they are on the pre defined server IP address MAC address binding list Thus the DHCP server can be restricted to service a specified DHCP client This is useful when there are two or more DHCP servers present on a network Parameters ippaddr The IP address of the DHCP server to be filtered macaddr The MAC address of the DHCP client state Enable Disable the DHCP filter state ports lt portlist gt The port number to which the DHCP filter will be applied Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Enabling the DHCP filter will create one access profile and create one access rule per port UDP port 67 Addition of a DHCP filter permit entry will create one access profile and create one access rule DA client MAC address SA source IP address and UDP port 67 Example usage To add an entry from the DHCP server client filter list in the switch s database DAS 3626 admini config filter dhcp server add permit server_ip 10 1 1 1 client_mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 port 1 12 Command config filter dhcp server add permit server ip 10 1 1 1 client_mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 port 1 12 Success DAS 3626
286. mmand history DAS 3626 admin show command history Command show command history config command history 20 config stp DAS 3626 admin 473 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Appendix A Passworp Recovery PROCEDURE This section describes the procedure for resetting passwords on D Link Switches Authenticating any user who tries to access networks is necessary and important The basic authentication method used to accept qualified users is through a local login utilizing a Username and Password Sometimes passwords get forgotten or destroyed so network administrators need to reset these passwords This section will explain how the Password Recovery feature can help network administrators reach this goal The following steps explain how to use the Password Recovery feature on D Link devices to easily recover passwords Complete these steps to reset the password 1 For security reasons the Password Recovery feature requires the user to physically access the device Therefore this feature is only applicable when there is a direct connection to the console port of the device It is necessary for the user needs to attach a terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the console port of the switch 2 Power on the switch After the runtime image is loaded to 100 the Switch will allow 2 seconds for the user to press the hotkey Shift 6 to enter the Password Recovery Mod
287. mp_snooping static_group Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the current IGMP snooping static group information on the Switch create igmp_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipaddr gt This command allows you to create an IGMP snooping static group Member ports can be added to the static group The static member and the dynamic member port form the member ports of a group The static group will only take effect when IGMP snooping is enabled on the VLAN For those static member ports the device needs to emulate the IGMP protocol operation to the querier and forward the traffic destined to the multicast group to the member ports For a layer 3 device the device is also responsible to route the packet destined for this specific group to static member ports The static member port will only affect V2 IGMP operation The Reserved IP multicast address 224 0 0 X must be excluded from the configured group The VLAN must be created first before a static group can be created lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to create IGMP snooping static group information lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to create IGMP snooping static group information lt jpaddr gt The static group address for which to create IGMP snooping static group information Only Administrator and Operator leve
288. multicast_vlan Purpose Used to show the information of MLD multicast VLAN Syntax show mld_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command is used to show the information of an MLD multicast VLAN Parameters lt vian_name gt The name of the multicast VLAN to be shown If not specified all MLD multicast VLANs will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To show MLD multicast VLAN DAS 3626 admin show mld_snooping multicast_vlan mvl Command show mld_snooping multicast vlan mv1 MLD Multicast VLAN Global State Disabled VLAN Name mvl VID 23 Member Untagged Ports Tagged Member Ports Source Ports Status Disabled Replace Source IP Total Entry 1 DAS 3626 admin 189 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config mid_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched Purpose Used to configure forwarding mode for MLD Multicast VLAN unmatched packet Syntax config mld_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched disable enable Description When the switch receives an MLD packet it will match the packet against the multicast profile to determine the MLD multicast VLAN to be associated with If the packet does not match any profiles the packet will be forwarded or dropped based on the setting By default the packet will be dropped Parameters enable The unmatched packet will be flooded on the VLAN disable The unmatched packet will be
289. multicast_vlan_group Command show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group VLAN ID Multicast Group Profiles DAS 3626 admin delete mid_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to delete an MLD muticast VLAN Syntax delete mld_snooping multicat_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command is used to delete an MLD multicast VLAN Parameters vian_name The name of the multicast VLAN to be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete an MLD multicast VLAN DAS 3626 admini delete mld snooping multicast vlan mv1 Command delete mld_snooping multicast vlan mv1 Success DAS 3626 admin 188 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable disable mid_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to enable disable the MLD Multicast VLAN function Syntax enable mid_snooping multicast_vlan disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan Description This command controls the MLD Multicast VLAN function The MLD Multicast VLAN will take effect when MLD snooping multicast VLAN is enabled By default the MLD Multicast VLAN is in a disabled state Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable MLD Multicast VLAN DAS 3626 admini enable mld_snooping multicast_vlan Command enable mld _ snooping multicast _vlan Success DAS 3626 admin show mlid_snooping
290. n Description This command will display the current IGMP setup currently configured on the Switch Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view IGMP snooping group information lt vianid_list gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which to view IGMP snooping group information lt portlist gt The list of ports for which to view IGMP snooping group information lt ipaddr gt To view the information of this specified group data_driven To view the groups learnt by data driven only If no parameter is specified the system will display all current GMP snooping groups Restrictions None 167 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To view the current IGMP snooping group DAS 3626 admini show igmp snooping group Command show igmp snooping group Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports Up Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports Up Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports Up Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports Up Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports Up Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports Up Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Total Entries DAS 3626 admin NULL 224 1 1 1 default 1 12 62 198 EXCLUDE NULL 224 1 1 default 1 11 72 188 EXCLUDE 29
291. n vlan lt vlan_name gt Description This commands displays the statistic control entries created for VLANs Parameters vian_name Specifies the VLAN name Restrictions None Example usage To display the statistic control entries DAS 3626 admin show vlan_counter utilization Command show vlan_counter utilization VLAN Counter Utilization Port VLAN ID RX BYTES SEC TX BYTES SEC show vian_counter statistics Purpose Displays the VLAN level receives packets or receive byte statistics Syntax show vian_counter statistics vlan lt vlan_name gt vlanid lt vidlist gt port lt portlist gt Description This command displays the VLAN level receives packet or receive byte statistics Parameters vian_name Specifies the VLAN name Restrictions None Example usage To display the VLAN counter statistic entries DAS 3626 admin show vilan_counter statistics Command show vlan_counter statistics VLAN Counter Port VLAN ID RX RX BYTES TX BYTES 110208 110208 0 275 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual QoS Commanps The Switch supports 802 1p priority queuing The Switch has 8 priority queues These priority queues are numbered from 7 Class 7 the highest priority queue to 0 Class 0 the lowest priority queue The eight priority tags specified in IEEE 802 1p p0 to p7 are mapped to the Switch s priority queues as follows e Priority 0 is
292. n and Internal Spanning Tree internalCost This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports when an interface is selected within a STP instance The default setting is auto There are two options auto Selecting this parameter for the internalCost will set quickest route automatically and optimally for an interface The default value is derived from the media speed of the interface value 1 200000000 Selecting this parameter with a value in the range of 1 200000000 will set the quickest route when a loop occurs A lower interna Cost represents a quicker transmission priority lt value 0 240 gt Enter a value between 0 and 240 to set the priority for the port interface A higher priority will designate the interface to forward packets first A lower number denotes a higher priority This value must be divisible by 16 241 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp mst_ports Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To designate ports 1 through 5 with instance id 2 to have an auto internalCost and a priority of 16 DAS 3626 admini config stp mst_ports 1 5 instance_id 2 internalCost auto priority 16 Command config stp mst_ports 1 5 instance id 2 internalCost auto priority 16 Success DAS 3626 admin show stp Purpose Used to display the Switch s current STP configuration
293. n This command is used to remove a static IPv6 neighbor from an existing IPv6 interface previously created on the switch Parameters lt ipif_name 12 gt Enter the IPv6 interface name previously created using the create ipif commands all Enter this parameter to denote all IPv6 interfaces created on the switch lt ipv6addr gt Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor device to be removed from being an IPv6 neighbor of the IP interface previously entered in this command static Enter this command to remove all statically configured neighbor devices from being an IPv6 neighbor of the IP interface previously entered dynamic Enter this command to remove all dynamically configured neighbor devices from being an IPv6 neighbor of the IP interface previously entered all Enter this parameter to remove all IPv6 neighbors of the switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a static IPv6 neighbor DAS 3626 admini delete ipw6 neighbor cache ipif System 3FFC 1 Command delete ipv6 neighbor cache ipif System 3FFC 1 Success DAS 3626 admin show Mon CoM neighbor_cache ipif Purpose Used to view the neighbor cache of an IPv6 interface located on the Switch Syntax show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt all ipv6address lt ipv6addr gt static dynamic all Description This command is used to display the IPv6 neighbors of a configured IPv6
294. n delete vlan vlanid 5 Command delete vlan vlanid 5 Success DAS 3626 admin config vlan Purpose Used to add additional ports to a previously configured VLAN Syntax config vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt add tagged untagged forbidden delete lt portlist gt advertisement enable disable Description This command allows the user to add ports to the port list of a previously configured VLAN The user can specify the additional ports as tagging untagging or forbidden The default is to assign the ports as untagging Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN to which to add ports add Entering the add parameter will add ports to the VLAN There are three types of ports to add e tagged Specifies the additional ports as tagged e untagged Specifies the additional ports as untagged e forbidden Specifies the additional ports as forbidden delete Deletes ports from the specified VLAN lt portlist gt A port or range of ports to add to or delete from the specified VLAN advertisement enable disable Enables or disables GVRP on the specified VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add 4 through 8 as tagged ports to the VLAN v1 138 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin config vlan vl add tagged 4 8 Command config vlan vl add tagged 4 8 Success
295. name mip Specifies and controls the creation of MIPs none Specifies that MIPs will not be created This is the default value auto MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MD if that port is not configured with a MEP of this MD For the intermediate switch in a MA the setting must be auto in order for the MIPs to be created on this device explicit MIPs can be created on any ports in this MD only if the existing lower level has an MEP configured on that port and that port is not configured with an MEP of this MD Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 256 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure CFM on a maintenance domain DAS 3626 admini config cfm md op domain mip explicit Command config cfm md op domain mip explicit Success DAS 3626 admin create cfm ma Purpose Used to create a maintenance association Syntax create cfm ma lt string 22 gt md lt string 22 gt Description Different MAs in a MD must have different MA Names Different MAs in different MDs may have the same MA Name Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a CFM maintenance association DAS 3626 admini create cfm ma opl md op domain Command
296. nd Example usage To configure the Switch name for DAS 3600 12 Switch DAS 3626 admini config snmp system_name DAS 3600 12 Switch Command config snmp system_name DAS 3600 12 Switch Success DAS 3626 admin enable snmp Purpose Used to enable the SNMP interface access function Syntax enable snmp Description This command is used to enable the SNMP function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable snmp on the Switch DAS 3626 admin enable snmp Command enable snmp Success DAS 3626 admin 118 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual disable snmp Purpose Used to disable the SNMP interface access function Syntax disable snmp Description This command is used to disable the SNMP function When the SNMP function is disabled the network manager will not be able to access SNMP MIB objects The device will not send traps or notifications to the network manager either Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable SNMP on the Switch DAS 3626 admin disable snmp Command disable snmp Success DAS 3626 admin 119 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Time AND SNTP Commanps The Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP an adaptation of the Network Time Protoco
297. ng the XTACACS authentication protocol tacacs Use this parameter to define the protocol if the server host is using the TACACS authentication protocol radius Use this parameter to define the protocol if the server host is using the RADIUS authentication protocol Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To add an authentication host to server group group_1 DAS 3626 admin config authen server group group_1 add server host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs Command config authen server group group_1 add server host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs Success DAS 3626 admin 379 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to delete a user defined authentication server group Syntax delete authen server_group lt string 15 gt Description This command will delete an authentication server group Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the previously created server group to be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the server group group_1 DAS 3626 admini delete server group group 1 Command delete server _group group_1 Success DAS 3626 admin show authen server_group Purpose Used to view authentication server groups on the Switch Syntax show authen server_group lt string 15 gt Description
298. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ne 32 BASIC IP COMMAND Si eaii iiecconsctinwnsetuctiseiietavadsbevesnvenvanudduiiieantedeinuaietusinwaredendvacasimvsdeuddideuseeaees 44 ROUTING TABLE COMMAND Sivissiceicnisicsstindiscisaciectiesoucarsencaencrandindsnseatencddndestinesatevanasasuassioudeesd 48 IPV6 NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY COMMANDS ssssunnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenne 50 LIMITED IP MULTICAST ADDRESS isisississsisscsestrasesanseesdstastesciestaactitsunansscwrastacssosdevenndaeitiniesvaeds 54 SWITCH PORT COMMAND Sicisiteicisnanisissccsedsiacnisesacavuaratinicisansscinsaiarsenaddianiaasinnaermaniniatdednninvatnvads 61 ARP COMMANDS aaa ante aa vas ean iad Geet een ata Ata sae a 66 DHCP RELAY aeaaaee can a a n aa ra aia a aaa ans aaaea iaeaea iea ee tanai a 78 EXTERNAL ALARM COMMANDS ssesssssenunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennnen 84 NETWORK MANAGEMENT SNMP COMMAND cccccccssteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesneeeeeseseesssessnseeees 86 TIME AND SNTP COMMANDS isciiscnctsiccocaccvaiencac rc cceseeticannats ddveaddvtuenen cnsuvesdenrnanteeradouancdaiwdennestenss 120 VEAN COMMAND S a e a eaat reeves encvcaneunstercasubiidentdszaceunveecaradvadaedurtaccstacadaecacasseuuaadtursves 125 Q N Q COMMAND Siiocsscascantaeei av cnsaeiesscantenaisscasazevenesdutevsdiduhseateasastaavegetamoats dbaelsGesdddinss artentcndvans 150 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDG cccccccseeeeeeeseeeeeeesecnees
299. nostic result Parameters lt portlist gt all The list of port numbers to config bit_map display VDSL line per tone bit map snr_margin_map display VDSL line per tone SNR Margin map psd_map display VDSL line per tone PSD map attenuation_map display VDSL line per tone attenuation map status display VDSL line status loop_diagnostic display VDSL line loop diagnostic result pm_counters 15mins 1day display VDSL 15 minute or 1 day performance counter 416 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show vdsl line Restrictions Only Administrator level users or Operation level can issue this command 417 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage Show vdsl line bit map 418 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show vdsl line 24 bit_map show vdsl line 24 bit_map 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 5 32 6 6 6 0 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 48 8 7 7 7 7 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 64 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 8 8 7 80 8 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 96 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 8 8 8 112 8 8 9 8 9 8 9 8 9 8 9 8 9 8 9 7 128 0 0 7 8 9 8 9 8 9 9 9 8 9 8 9 8 144 9 8 9 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 8 9 9 9 9 8 160 8 9 9 9 9 9 9
300. ns Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an access list rules DAS 3626 admini create access profile profile id 5 profile _name 5 ethernet vlan source mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 destination_mac 00 00 00 00 00 02 802 1p ethernet_type Command create access profile profile id 5 profile name 5 ethernet vlan source _mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 destination mac 00 00 00 00 00 02 802 1p ethernet _type Success DAS 3626 admin 400 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete access_profile Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete a previously created access profile delete access_profile profile_id lt value 1 12 gt all profile_name lt name 1 32 gt This command is used to delete a previously created access profile on the Switch profile_id lt value 1 12 gt Enter an integer between 1 and 12 that is used to identify the access profile that will be deleted with this command This value is assigned to the access profile when it is created with the create access_profile command The user may enter a profile ID number between 1 and 12 yet remember only 12 access profiles can be created on the Switch profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Specifies the name of the profile The maximum length is 32 characters all Entering this parameter will delete all access profiles currently configured
301. nt 0 4294967295 gt show ipv6 nd ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif Purpose This command is used to add a static IPv6 neighbor Syntax create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt lt ipv6addr gt lt macaddr gt Description This command is used to add a static IPv6 neighbor to an existing IPv6 interface previously created on the switch Parameters lt ipif_ name 12 gt Enter the IPv6 interface name previously created using the create ipif command lt ipv6addr gt Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor device to be added as an IPv6 neighbor of the IP interface previously entered in this command lt macadadr gt Enter the MAC address of the neighbor device to be added as an IPv6 neighbor of the IP interface previously entered in this command Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a static IPv6 neighbor DAS 3626 admini create ipv6 neighbor cache ipif System 3FFC 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 Command create ipv6 neighbor cache ipif System 3FFC 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 Success DAS 3626 admin 50 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif Purpose Used to remove a static IPv6 neighbor Syntax delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt all lt ipv6addr gt static dynamic all Descriptio
302. ntax show ssh algorithm Description This command is used to display the current SSH algorithm setting status Parameters None Restrictions None Usage Example To display SSH algorithms currently set on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show ssh algorithm Command show ssh algorithm Encryption Algorithm Enabled AES128 Enabled AES192 Enabled AES256 Enabled Arcfour Enabled Blowfish Enabled Cast128 Enabled Twofish128 Enabled Twofish192 Enabled Twofish256 Enabled Data Integrity Algorithm Enabled Enabled Public Key Algorithm Enabled DSA Enabled q Quit SPACE nl Next Page ENTER Next Entry A All 326 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Access AUTHENTICATION CONTROL COMMANDS The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS commands allows secure access to the Switch using the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS protocols When a user logs in to the Switch or tries to access the administrator level privilege he or she is prompted for a password If TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS authentication is enabled on the Switch it will contact a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify the user If the user is verified he or she is granted access to the Switch There are currently three versions of the TACACS security protocol each a separate entity The Switch s software supports the following versions of TACACS e TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access C
303. nual config authen server_host Purpose Used to configure a user defined authentication server host Syntax config authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius port lt int 1 65535 gt key lt key_string 254 gt none timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt 1 255 gt Description This command will configure a user defined authentication server host for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security protocols on the Switch When a user attempts to access the Switch with the authentication protocol enabled the Switch will send authentication packets to a remote TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host on a remote host The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host will then verify or deny the request and return the appropriate message to the Switch More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16 Parameters server_host lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the remote server host the user wishes to alter protocol The protocol used by the server host The user may choose one of the following e tacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol e xtacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol e tacacs Enter this parameter if the server
304. o Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage This command enables the auto configuration of link local addresses when no IPv6 address is configured enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto lt ipif_name 12 gt all This command is used to enable the auto configuration of link local addresses when there are no IPv6 addresses explicitly configured When an IPv6 address is explicitly configured the link local address will be automatically configured and the IPv6 processing will be started When there is no IPv6 address explicitly configured by default link local address is not configured and the IPv6 processing will be disabled By enabling this automatic configuration the link local address will be automatically configured and IPv6 processing will be started lt ipif_ name 12 gt The name of the IP interface all Indidcates all IP interfaces Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable the automatic configuration of link local address for an interface DAS 3626 admini enable ipif ipv6 link local auto all Command enable ipif ipv6 link _local_auto all Success DAS 3626 admin 46 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto Purpose Disables the auto configuration of link local addresses when no IPv6 addresses are configured Syntax disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto lt ipif_name 12 g
305. o configure the timers and the attributes of the MLD snooping querier Syntax config mld_snooping querier vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all query_interval lt sec 1 65535 gt max_response_time lt sec 1 25 gt robustness_variable lt value 1 255 gt last_listener_query_interval lt sec 1 25 gt state enable disable version lt value 1 2 gt Description This command is used to configure the timer in seconds between general query transmissions the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners and the permitted packet loss that guarantees MLD snooping Parameters vlan_name The name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured vidlist The VIDs of the VLAN for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured query_interval Specifies the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions The default setting is 125 seconds max_reponse_time The maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners The default setting is 10 seconds robustness_variable Provides fine tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet The value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following MLD message intervals e group listener interval Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more listeners of a group on a network This interval is calculated as follows robustness variable query interval 1
306. o enter a encryption key for authentication and privacy The key is defined by specifying the key in hex form below This method is not recommended auth The user may also choose the type of authentication algorithms used to authenticate the snmp user The choices are md5 Specifies that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used md5 may be utilized by entering one of the following lt auth password 8 16 gt An alphanumeric string of between 8 and 16 characters that will be used to authorize the agent to receive packets for the host lt auth_key 32 32 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of exactly 32 characters in hex form to define the key that will be used to authorize the agent to receive packets for the host sha Specifies that the HMAC SHA 96 authentication level will be used lt auth password 8 20 gt An alphanumeric string of between 8 and 20 characters that will be used to authorize the agent to receive packets for the host lt auth_key 40 40 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of exactly 40 characters in hex form to define the key that will be used to authorize the agent to receive packets for the host priv Adding the priv privacy parameter will allow for encryption in addition to the authentication algorithm for higher security The user may choose des Adding this parameter will allow for a 56 bit encryption to be added using the DES 56 standard using lt priv_password
307. ock or any other unwanted function that changes text case Purpose Encloses a variable or value that must be specified Syntax config ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt ipaddress lt network_address gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt state enable disable bootp dhcp ipv6 ipv6address lt ipv6networkaddr gt state enable disable ipv4 state enable disable Description In the above syntax example users must supply an IP interface name in the lt ipif_name 12 gt space a VLAN name in the lt vlan_name 32 gt space and the network address in the lt network_address gt space Do not type the angle brackets Example config ipif Engineering ipaddress 10 24 22 5 255 0 0 0 vian Design state enable Command Purpose Encloses a required value or set of required arguments One value or argument can be specified create account admin operator user lt username 15 gt Description In the above syntax example users must specify either an admin or a user level account to be created Do not type the square brackets Example create account admin Tommy Command Purpose Separates two or more mutually exclusive items in a list one of which must be entered Syntax create account admin operator user lt username 15 gt Description In the above syntax example users must specify either admin or user Do not type the backslash Example create account admin Tommy Command DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Man
308. ode Purpose Used to display the SSH user setting Syntax show ssh user authmode Description This command is used to display the current SSH user setting Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the SSH user DAS 3626 admin show ssh user authmode Command show ssh user authmode Current Accounts Username AuthMode Password Total Entries DAS 3626 admin cs Note To configure the SSH user the administrator must create a user account on the Switch For information concerning configuring a user l account please see the section of this manual entitled Basic Switch Commands and then the command create account 324 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config ssh algorithm Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Usage example Used to configure the SSH algorithm config ssh algorithm 3DES AES128 AES192 AES256 arcfour blowfish cast128 twofish128 twofish192 twofish256 MD5 SHA1 RSA DSA enable disable This command is used to configure the desired type of SSH algorithm used for authentication encryption 3DES This parameter will enable or disable the Triple Data Encryption Standard encryption algorithm AES128 This parameter will enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES128 encryption algorithm AES192 This parameter will enabl
309. ofile TX RX SNR margin e max maximum SNR margin increments of 0 5dB It mean 1 as 0 5dB 62 as 31dB min minimum SNR margin increments of 0 5dB It mean 1 as 0 5dB 62 as 31dB target target SNR margin increments of 0 5dB It mean 1 as 0 5dB 62 as 31 dB m lt vdsl_snr_target 0 62 gt increments of 0 5dB It mean 1 as 0 5dB 62 as 31 dB Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile TX RX SNR margin DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default SnrMarginTx max 20 min 10 target 15 Command config vdsl profile name default SnrMarginTx max 20 min 10 target 15 Success DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile InterleaveDelayDn InterleaveDelayUp Purpose Used to config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream interleave delay Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt InterleaveDelayDn InterleaveDelayUp lt vdsl_inter_delay 0 62 gt Description This command is used to config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream interleave delay Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed InterleaveDelayDn InterleaveDelayUp To config VDSL profile Downstream Upstream interleave delay lt vdsl_inter_delay 0 62 gt interleave delay Provisioned in steps of 0 5 ms It mean 1 as 0 5ms 62 as 31ms Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issu
310. ol flag finish udp Specifies that the Switch will examine the User Datagram Protocol UDP field in each packet src_port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this UDP source port in their UDP header dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this UDP destination port in their UDP header protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the Switch will examine the protocol field in each packet and if this field contains the value entered here apply the following rules user_define lt hex Ox0 Oxfffffff gt Specifies a mask to be combined with the value found in the frame header and if this field contains the value entered here apply the following rules packet_content_mask Allows users to examine any up to four specified offset_chunk within a packet at one time and specifies that the Switch will mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified as follows packet_content destination_mac lt macaddr gt mask lt macmask gt source_mac lt macaddr gt mask lt macmask gt outer_tag lt hex 0x0 0x0fff gt mask lt hex 0x0 OxOfff gt offset1 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset2 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset3 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt mask lt hex 0x0 0xff gt offset4 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt mask lt hex 0x0 O0xff gt offset5 lt hex 0x0 0xff gt
311. ommand is used to delete all of the created user accounts The banner messages for password recover mode is Password Recovery Mode None This command is only available in password recovery mode To reset or delete an account gt reset account Command reset account Success reset password Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to reset the password for user account reset password lt username gt This command is used to reset the password of the specified user to empty If username is not specified password of all users will be reset None This command is only available in password recovery mode To reset the password gt reset password Command reset password Success 468 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show account Purpose Used to show the created account Syntax show account Description This command is used to display all already created accounts Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view the created account gt show account Command show account Current Accounts Password Access Level Empty Empty Total Entries 469 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Commanp History List The switch history commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command P
312. ommunity SNMP Community Table View Name Access Right ReadView read write CommunityView read write CommunityView read only DAS 3626 admin config snmp enginelD Purpose Used to configure a name for the SNMP engine on the Switch Syntax config snmp enginelD lt snmp_enginelD 10 64 gt Description This command is used to configure a name for the SNMP engine on the Switch Parameters lt config snmp_enginelD gt An alphanumeric string that will be used to identify the SNMP engine on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To give the SNMP agent on the Switch the name 0035636666 DAS 3626 admin config snmp engineID 0035636666 Command config snmp engineID 0035636666 Success DAS 3626 admin show snmp enginelD Purpose Used to display the identification of the SNMP engine on the Switch Syntax show snmp enginelD Description This command is used to display the identification of the SNMP engine on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the current name of the SNMP engine on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show snmp engineID Command show snmp engineID SNMP Engine ID 800000ab03000102030400 DAS 3626 admin 97 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create snmp group Purpose Used to create a new SNMP group or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views Syntax create snm
313. onfig igmp_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipaddr gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command is used to add or delete ports to from the given static group Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to configure IGMP snooping static group information lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to configure IGMP snooping static group information lt jpaddr gt The static group address for which to configure IGMP snooping static group information add delete lt portlist gt Portlist to add or delete Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add port 5 to static group 226 1 1 1 on VID 1 DAS 3626 admini config igmp_snooping static_group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 add 5 Command config igmp_ snooping static group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 add 5 Success DAS 3626 admin 172 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual clear igmp_snooping statistic counter Purpose Used to clear the current IGMP snooping statistic on the Switch Syntax clear igmp_snooping statistic counter Description This command is used to clear all IGMP snooping statistic counters Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear IGMP snooping statistic counter DAS 3626 admin cl
314. onfigured all Configure port security for all ports on the Switch admin_state enable disable Enable or disable port security for the listed ports max_learning_addr lt max_lock_no 0 512 gt Use this to limit the number of MAC addresses dynamically listed in the FDB for the ports lock_address_mode Permanent DeleteOnTimout DeleteOnReset Indicates the method of locking addresses The user has three choices permanent The locked addresses will not age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnTimeout The locked addresses will age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnReset The locked addresses will not age out until the Switch has been restarted Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the port security 293 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini config port security ports 1 5 admin_state enable max_learning addr 5 lock_address mode deleteonreset Command config port _security ports 1 5 admin_state enable max_learning addr 5 lock_address mode deleteonreset Success DAS 3626 admin delete port_security_entry Purpose Used to delete a port security entry by MAC address and VLAN ID Syntax delete port_security_entry vlan_name lt vlan_name 32 gt mac_address lt macaddr gt port lt port gt Description This command is used to delete a single previously learned port security entry VLAN name
315. onfigured method list default Use this parameter to configure an application for user authentication using the default method list method_list_name lt string 15 gt Use this parameter to configure an application for user authentication using a previously configured method list Enter a alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define a previously configured method list Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the default method list for the web interface DAS 3626 admin config authen application http login default Command config authen application http login default Success DAS 3626 admin show authen application Purpose Used to display authentication methods for the various applications on the Switch Syntax show authen application Description This command will display all of the authentication method lists login enable administrator privileges for Switch configuration applications console telnet SSH web currently configured on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the login and enable method list for all applications on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show authen application Command show authen application 373 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Application Login Method List Enable Method List Console default default
316. ons Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the recover time to 0 and interval to 20 and VLAN based mode DAS 3626 admin config loopdetect recover_timer 0 interval 20 mode vlan based Command config loopdetect recover_timer 0 interval 20 mode vlan based Success DAS 3626 admin 207 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config loopdetect ports Purpose Used to configure loop back detection state of ports Syntax config loopdetect ports lt portlist gt all state enabled disabled Description This command is used to configure loop back detection state of ports Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports for the loop back detection state enabled disabled Allows the loop back detection to be disabled and enabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the loop detect state to enable DAS 3626 admin tconfig loopdetect ports 1 5 state enabled Command config loopdetect ports 1 5 state enabled Success DAS 3626 admin enable loopdetect Purpose Used to globally enable loop back detection on the switch Syntax enable loopdetect Description This command is used to globally enable loop back detection on the switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To en
317. ontrol System Provides password checking and authentication and notification of user actions for security purposes utilizing via one or more centralized TACACS servers utilizing the UDP protocol for packet transmission e Extended TACACS XTACACS An extension of the TACACS protocol with the ability to provide more types of authentication requests and more types of response codes than TACACS This protocol also uses UDP to transmit packets e TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System plus Provides detailed access control for authentication for network devices TACACS is facilitated through Authentication commands via one or more centralized servers The TACACS protocol encrypts all traffic between the Switch and the TACACS daemon using the TCP protocol to ensure reliable delivery The Switch also supports the RADIUS protocol for authentication using the Access Authentication Control commands RADIUS or Remote Authentication Dial In User Server also uses a remote server for authentication and can be responsible for receiving user connection requests authenticating the user and returning all configuration information necessary for the client to deliver service through the user RADIUS may be facilitated on this Switch using the commands listed in this section In order for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security function to work properly a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server must be configured on a devic
318. optional parameter for configuring medium type combo ports For no combo ports user does not need to specify medium_type in the commands state enable disable Enables or disables the specified range of ports description Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to describe a selected port interface clear description To clear the description Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command o 7 NOTE VDSL port can not be configured for speed state and medium type Gigabit Ethernet Fiber ports only can be set to 1000M Full or auto Example usage To configure the speed of port 25 to be 10 Mbps full duplex learning enabled state enabled and flow control enabled DAS 3626 admini config port 25 speed 10 full learning enable state enable flow_control config port 25 speed 10 full learning enable state enable flow_control enable DAS 3626 admin 62 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show ports Purpose Used to display the current configuration of a range of ports Syntax show ports lt portlist gt description err_disabled Description This command is used to display the current configuration of a range of ports Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed description Adding this parameter to the show ports command indicates that a previously entered port descript
319. orts 12 UP Time 222 Expiry Time 258 Filter Mode INCLUDE Total Entries DAS 3626 admin show mid_snooping mrouter_ports Purpose Used to display the currently configured router ports on the switch Syntax show mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all static dynamic forbidden Description This command is used to display the currently configured router ports on the switch Parameters vlan_name The name of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping configuration vid list The VIDs of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping configuration all All the MLD router ports will be displayed static Displays router ports that have been statically configured dynamic Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured forbidden Displays forbidden router ports that have been statically configured If no parameter specified the system will display all currently configured router ports on the switch Restrictions None Example usage To display the router ports on the switch DAS 3626 admini show mld_snooping mrouter_ports all Command show mld_ snooping mrouter ports all VLAN Name default Static router port Dynamic router port Router IP Forbidden router port Total Entries 1 DAS 3626 admin show mld_snooping rate_limit Purpose Used to show rate limitation 197 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch C
320. ose Used to config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream robust EOC rate Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt robustEocRateDn robustEocRateUp rate lt int 0 4 gt Description This command is used to config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream robust EOC rate Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed robustEocRateDn robustEocRateUp To config VDSL profile Downstream Upstream robust EOC rate rate lt int 0 4 gt The range is 0 4 in unit of 32 kbps Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile vdsl profile Downstream Upstream robust EOC rate DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default robustEocRateDn rate 1 Command config vdsl profile name default robustEocRateDn rate 1 Success DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile reset Purpose Used to reset vdsl profile Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt reset Description This command is used to reset vdsl profile Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed reset reset the specific profile to default Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To reset vdsl profile to default
321. ost utilizes the TACACS protocol e radius Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol port lt int 1 65535 gt Enter a number between 7 and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication protocol on a server host The default port number is 49 for TACACS XTACACS TACACS servers and 1812 and 1813 for RADIUS servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher security key lt key_string 254 gt Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS or RADIUS server only Specify an alphanumeric string up to 254 characters timeout lt int 1 255 gt Enter the time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request The default value is 5 seconds retransmit lt int 1 255 gt Enter the value in the retransmit field to change how many times the device will resend an authentication request when the server does not respond Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a TACACS authentication server host with port number 1234 a timeout value of 10 seconds and a retransmit count of 5 DAS 3626 admini create authen server host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs port 1234 timeout 10 retransmit 5 Command create authen server host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs port 1234 timeout 10 retransmit 5 Success DAS 3626 admin 374 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Ma
322. ost will be forwarded to the source port Before forwarding of the packet the source IP address in the join packet needs to replaced by this IP address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 176 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure an IGMP multicast VLAN DAS 3626 admin config igmp snooping multicast _vlan vl add member port 1 3 state enable Command config igmp_ snooping multicast vlan vl add member port 1 3 state enable Success DAS 3626 admin config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group Purpose Used to configure the multicast group which will be learned with the specific IGMP multicast VLAN Syntax lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete profile_name lt profile_name 1 32 Description This command is used to configure the multicast group which will be learned by the specific IGMP multicast VLAN There are two cases that need to be considered The join packet will be learned with the IGMP multicast VLAN that contains the destination multicast group If the destination multicast group of the join packet can not be classified into any IGMP multicast VLAN that this port belongs to then the join packet will be learned with the natural VLAN of the packet When an IGMP packet is received first it will check whether to be processed by the IGMP snooping If the IGMP snooping for the classified VLAN of this IGMP packet is enabled it wil
323. otiation process Parameters timeout lt value 60 86400 gt Enter a timeout value between 60 and 86400 seconds to specify the total time an SSL key exchange ID stays valid before the SSL module will require a new full SSL negotiation for connection The default cache timeout is 600 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the SSL cachetimeout for 7200 seconds DAS 3626 admin config ssl cachetimeout 7200 Command config ssl cachetimeout 7200 Success DAS 3626 admin 300 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show ssl cachetimeout Purpose Used to show the SSL cache timeout Syntax show ssl cachetimeout Description This command is used to view the SSL cache timeout currently implemented on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view the SSL cache timeout on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show ssl cachetimeout Command show ssl cachetimeout Cache timeout is 600 second s DAS 3626 admin show ssl Purpose Used to view the SSL status and the certificate file status on the Switch Syntax show ssl Description This command is used to view the SSL status on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view the SSL status on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show ssl Command show ssl SSL status Enabled RSA_WITH_RC4_128 MD5 Enabled RSA_WITH_3DES EDE CBC_SHA Enabled D
324. otify View Name Security Model Security Level Total Entries 5 DAS 3626 admin Group3 ReadView WriteView NotifyView SNMPv3 NoAuthNoPriv Group4 ReadView WriteView NotifyView SNMPv3 authNoPriv Group5 ReadView WriteView NotifyView SNMPv3 authNoPriv initial restricted restricted SNMPv3 NoAuthNoPriv ReadGroup CommunityView CommunityView SNMPv1 NoAuthNoPriv 100 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 101 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create snmp host Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to create a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent create snmp host lt ipaddr gt v6host lt ipv6addr gt v1 v2c v3 noauth_nopriv auth_nopriv auth_priv lt auth_string 32 gt This command is used to create a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent lt jpaddr gt The IP address of the remote management station that will serve as the SNMP host for the Switch v6host Specifies the v6host IP address to which the trap packet will be sent v1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP version 1 is a network management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control network devices v2c Specifies that SNMP version 2c will be used The SNMP v2c supports both centralized and distributed network manage
325. out never 2_minutes 5_ minutes 10_minutes 15_minutes This command is used to configure the serial bit rate that will be used to communicate with the management host and the auto logout time for idle connections baud_rate 9600 19200 38400 115200 The serial bit rate that will be used to communicate with the management host There are four options 9600 19200 38400 115200 Factory default setting is 115200 never No time limit on the length of time the console can be open with no user input 2_minutes The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 2 minutes 5_minutes The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 5 minutes 10_minutes The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 10 minutes 15 minutes The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 15 minutes 21 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config serial_port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 22 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure baud rate DAS 3626 admini config serial port baud_rate 115200 Command config serial_port baud _ rate 115200 Success DAS 3626 admin NOTE If a user configures the serial port s baud rate the baud rate will take effect and save po immediately Baud rate
326. own forever value 5 30 Select a time from 5 to 30 minutes that the Switch will wait before shutting down Once this time expires and the port is still experiencing packet storms the port will be placed in shutdown forever mode and can only be manually recovered using the config ports command mentioned previously in this manual Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 287 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure traffic control and enable broadcast storm control for ports 1 12 DAS 3626 admin config traffic control 1 12 broadcast enable action shutdown threshold 1 countdown 10 time_interval 10 Command config traffic control 1 12 broadcast enable action shutdown threshold 1 countdown 10 time interval 10 Success DAS 3626 admin show traffic control Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display current traffic control settings show traffic control lt portlist gt This command displays the current storm traffic control configuration on the Switch lt portlist gt Used to specify port or list of ports for which to display traffic control settings The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash None To display traffic control settings DAS 3626 admin show traffic control Command show traffic control Traffic Storm Control Port Thres 1310
327. p group lt groupname 32 gt v1 v2c v3 noauth_nopriv auth_nopriv auth_priv read_view lt view_name 32 gt write_view lt view_name 32 gt notify_view lt view_name 32 gt Description This command is used to create a new SNMP group or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views Parameters lt groupname 32 gt An alphanumeric name of up to 32 characters that will identify the SNMP group the new SNMP user will be associated with v1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP version 1 is a network management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control network devices v2c Specifies that SNMP version 2c will be used The SNMP v2c supports both centralized and distributed network management strategies It includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some security features v3 Specifies that the SNMP version 3 will be used SNMP v3 provides secure access to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network SNMP v3 adds e Message integrity Ensures that packets have not been tampered with during transit Authentication Determines if an SNMP message is from a valid source Encryption Scrambles the contents of messages to prevent it being viewed by an unauthorized source noauth_nopriv Specifies that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent be
328. play the IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile p1 DAS 3626 admin show igmp snooping multicast _vlan_group profile pl Command show igmp snooping multicast vlan group profile pl Profile Name Multicast Addresses 225 1 1 1 226 1 1 1 DAS 3626 admin 181 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched Purpose Used to configure forwarding mode for IGMP Multicast VLAN unmatched packets Syntax config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched disable enable Description When the switch receives an IGMP packet it will match the packet against the multicast profile to determine the multicast VLAN to be associated with If the packet does not match any profiles the packet will be forwarded or dropped based on the the setting By default the packet will be dropped Parameters enable The unmatched packet will be flooded on the VLAN disable The unmatched packet will be dropped Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set unmatched packets to be flooded on the VLAN DAS 3626 admini config igmp_ snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched enable Command config igmp_ snooping multicast _vlan forward unmatched enable Success DAS 3626 admin 182 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual MLD Mutticast VLAN Commanps The MLD Multicast VLA
329. ppropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create fdb lt vlan_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt port lt port gt create multicast_fdb lt vlan_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt config multicast_fdb lt vlan_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt add delete lt portlist gt config fdb aging_time lt sec 10 1000000 gt delete fdb lt vlan_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt clear fdb vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt port lt port gt all show multicast_fdb vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt mac_address lt macaddr gt show fdb port lt port gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt mac_address lt macaddr gt static aging_time config multicast vlanid lt vidlist gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt all forward_all_groups vian_filtering_ mode forward_unregistered_groups filter_unregistered_groups show multicast vlanid lt vidlist gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vian_filtering mode Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create fdb Purpose Used to create a static entry to the unicast MAC address forwarding table database Syntax create fdb lt vlan_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt port lt port gt Description This command will make an entry into the Switch s unicast MAC address forwarding database Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt macaddr gt The MAC address that will be added to the forwarding table port lt port gt The port number correspond
330. priority Purpose Used to display the current mapping between an incoming packet s 802 1p priority value and one of the Switch s eight hardware priority queues Syntax show 802 1p user_priority Description This command is used to display the current mapping of an incoming packet s 802 1p priority value to one of the Switch s eight hardware priority queues Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show 802 1p user priority DAS 3626 admin show 802 1p user priority Command show 802 1p user priority QOS Class of Traffic Priority 0 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Priority 5 Priority 6 Priority 7 lt Class 2 gt lt Class 0 gt lt Class 1 gt lt Class 3 gt lt Class 4 gt lt Class 5 gt lt Class 6 gt lt Class 7 gt DAS 3626 admin config 802 1p default_priority Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to configure the 802 1p default priority settings on the Switch If an untagged packet is received by the Switch the priority configured with this command will be written to the packet s priority field config 802 1p default_priority lt portlist gt all lt priority 0 7 gt This command allows the user to specify default priority handling of untagged packets received by the Switch The priority value entered with this command will be used to determine which of the eight hardware priority queues the packet is forwarded to lt portlist g
331. profile DAS 3626 admini create mcast_filter profile ipv4 profile _id 2 profile name RG Command create mcast_ filter profile ipv4 profile id 2 profile name RG Success DAS 3626 admin config mcast_filter_profile Purpose This command adds or deletes a range of multicast addresses to the profile Syntax config mcast_filter_profile profile_id lt value 1 60 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcast_address_list gt Description This command allows the user to add or delete a range of multicast IP addresses previously defined Parameters profile_id ID of the profile The range is 7 to 60 profile_name Provides a meaningful description for the profile mceast_address_list List of the multicast addresses to be put in the profile You can either specifiy a single multicast IP address or a range of multicast addresses using Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config an IPv4 multicast filter profile DAS 3626 admini config mcast_filter profile profile id 2 add 225 1 1 1 225 1 1 1 Command config mcast_ filter profile profile id 2 add 225 1 1 1 Success DAS 3626 admin 55 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 Purpose This command adds or deletes a range of IPv6 multicast addresses to the profile Syntax config mcast_filter_
332. profile ipv6 profile_id lt value 1 60 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcastv6_address_list gt Description This command allows the user to add or delete a range of multicast IPv6 addresses previously defined Parameters profile_id D of the profile Range is from 7 to 60 profile_name Provides a meaningful description for the profile mcast_address_list List of the IPv6 multicast addresses to be put in the profile You can either specifiy a single IPv6 multicast IP address or a range of IPv6 multicast addresses Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config an IPv6 mcast_filter_ profile DAS 3626 admini config mcast_filter profile ipv6 profile id 2 add FF12 1 FF12 1 Command config mcast_ filter profile ipv6 profile id 2 add FF12 1 Success DAS 3626 admin delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id Purpose This command deletes a multicast address profile Syntax delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id ipv4 ipv6 lt value 1 60 gt all Description This command deletes a multicast address profile Parameters profile_id ID of the profile all All multicast address profiles will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a multicast filter profile DAS 3626 admini delete mcast_filter profile profile _id
333. profile_name 32 gt attach lt portlist gt all Description This command is used to config VDSL profile to attach vdsl line Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed attach attached assigned profile to VDSL line lt portlist gt A port or range of ports to be attach Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile to attach VDSL line 1 DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default1 attach 1 Command config vdsl profile name default1 attach 1 Success DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile profile_nam Purpose Used to config vdsl profile Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt profile_name lt name gt Description This command is used to rename VDSL profile Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed profile_name rename VDSL profile lt name gt The name of the VDSL profile to rename Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To rename vdsl profile DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default1 profile_name default Command config vdsl profile name default1 profile_name default Success DAS 3626 admin 424 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VD
334. quence of methods like tacacs xtacacs local the Switch will send an authentication request to the first tacacs host in the server group If no response comes from the server host the Switch will send an authentication request to the second tacacs host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed xtacacs If no authentication takes place using the xtacacs list the local account database set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user When the local method is used the privilege level will be dependant on the local account privilege configured on the Switch Successful login using any of these methods will give the user a user privilege only If the user wishes to upgrade his or her status to the administrator level the user must implement the enable admin command followed by a previously configured password See the enable admin part of this section for more detailed information concerning the enable admin commana default The default method list for access authentication as defined by the user The user may choose one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods e tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from the remote TACACS server hosts of the TACACS server group list e xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user
335. query response interval other querier present interval Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the querier This interval is calculated as follows robustness variable query interval 0 5 query response interval last listener query count Number of group specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local listeners of a group The default number is the value of the robustness variable By default the robustness variable is set to 2 You might want to increase this value if you expect a subnet to be lossy last_listener_query_interval The maximum amount of time between group specific query messages including those sent in response to done group messages You might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the last listener of a group state Allows you to enable or disable the MLD snooping function for the chosen VLAN version The version of MLD Query sent by the switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the MLD snooping querier query interval to 125 secs and state enable DAS 3626 admin config mld_snooping querier vlan default query interval 125 state enable Command config mld_snooping querier vlan default query interval 125 state enable Success DAS 3626 admin 193
336. r wishes to add or delete ports to be mirrored that are specified in the source ports parameter source ports The port or ports being mirrored This cannot include the Target port lt portlist gt This specifies a port or range of ports that will be mirrored That is the range of ports in which all traffic will be copied and sent to the Target port rx Allows the mirroring of only packets received by flowing into the port or ports in the port list tx Allows the mirroring of only packets sent to flowing out of the port or ports in the port list both Mirrors all the packets received or sent by the port or ports in the port list The Target port cannot be listed as a source port Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 204 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To add the mirroring ports DAS 3626 admin tconfig mirror port 1 add source ports 2 5 both Command config mirror port 1 add source ports 2 5 both Success DAS 3626 admin Example usage To delete the mirroring ports DAS 3626 admin tconfig mirror port 1 delete source port 2 4 Command config mirror 1 delete source 2 4 Success DAS 3626 admin enable mirror Purpose Used to enable a previously entered port mirroring configuration Syntax enable mirror Description This command combined with the disable mirror command below allows the user to enter a
337. rd x DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to configure the local enable password for administrator level privileges Syntax config admin local_enable Description This command will configure the locally enabled password for the enable admin command When a user chooses the local_enable method to promote user level privileges to administrator privileges he or she will be prompted to enter the password configured here that is set locally on the Switch Parameters lt password 15 gt After entering this command the user will be prompted to enter the old password then a new password in an alphanumeric string of no more than 15 characters and finally prompted to enter the new password again for confirmation See the example below Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the password for the local_enable authentication method DAS 3626 admini config admin local enable Command config admin local_enable Enter the old password Enter the case sensitive new password x x Enter the new password again for confirmation Success DAS 3626 admin 390 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Firer Commanns DHCP Server NetBIOS DHCP Server Screening Settings This function allows you not only to restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any spe
338. reate a mld snooping static group Member ports can be added to the static group The static member and the dynamic member port form the member ports of a group The static group will only take effect when MLD snooping is enabled on the VLAN For those static member ports the device needs to emulate the MLD protocol operation to the querier and forward the traffic destined to the multicast group to the member ports For a layer 3 device the device is also responsible to route the packet destined for this specific group to static member ports The static member port will only affect V1 MLD operation The Reserved IP multicast address FFOE X must be excluded from the configured group The VLAN must be created first before a static group can be created Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to create MLD snooping static group information lt vianid_list gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to create MLD snooping static group information lt jpv6addr gt The static group IPv6 address for which to create MLD snooping static group information Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a static group FF12 1 for VID 1 DAS 3626 admini create mld_snooping static_group vlanid 1 FF12 1 Command create mld_snooping static group vlanid 1 FF12 1 Success DAS 3626 admin 200 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Ref
339. reation Explicit SenderID TLV None DAS 3626 admin Example usage To display CFM mepname DAS 3626 admin show cfm mepname mep1 Command show cfm mepname mep1 Name mepl MEPID ae Port I Direction inward CFM Port State enabled MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XX MEP State enabled CCM State enabled PDU Priority 27 Fault Alarm mac_status Alarm Time 2 second s Alarm Reset Time 10 second s Highest Fault Remote CCM Next LTM Trans ID 27 Out of Sequence CCMs Cross connect CCMs Error CCMs Port Status CCMs If Status CCMs In order LBRs CCMs LBMs Remote MEP Status Address Status RDI PortSt IfSt Detect Time Blocked Up 2008 01 01 IDLE No No 2008 01 01 OK Up Down 2008 01 01 START Up Up 2008 01 01 FAILED Up Up 2008 01 01 OK Up Up 2008 01 01 DAS 3626 admin 265 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show cfm fault Purpose This command is used to show fault MEPs Syntax show cfm fault md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt Description This command is used to display all the fault conditions detected by the MEPs contained in the specified MA or MD This display provides the overview of fault status by MEPs Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance domain name Restrictions None Example usage To display CFM fault DAS 3600 12 4 show cfm mep fault Command show cfm mep fault MA Name MEPID
340. rence Manual Example usage To set the maximum number of authentication attempts at 5 382 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin config authen parameter attempt 5 Command config authen parameter attempt 5 Success DAS 3626 admin 383 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 384 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to display the authentication parameters currently configured on the Switch Syntax show authen parameter Description This command will display the authentication parameters currently configured on the Switch including the response timeout and user authentication attempts This command will display the following fields Response timeout The configured time allotted for the Switch to wait for a response of authentication from the user attempting to log in from the command line interface or telnet interface User attempts The maximum number of attempts the user may try to become authenticated by the Switch before being locked out Parameters None 385 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 386 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To view the authentication parameters currently set on the Switch 387 DAS 3600 Series Etherne
341. respective spanning trees Each switch utilizing the MSTP on a network will have a single MSTP configuration that will have the following three attributes a A configuration name defined by an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters defined in the config stp mst_config_id command as name lt string gt b A configuration revision number named here as a revision_level and c A 4096 element table defined here as a vid_range which will associate each of the possible 4096 VLANs supported by the Switch for a given instance To utilize the MSTP function on the Switch three steps need to be taken a The Switch must be set to the MSTP setting config stp version b The correct spanning tree priority for the MSTP instance must be entered config stp priority c VLANs that will be shared must be added to the MSTP Instance ID config stp instance_id The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table 211 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command enable stp disable stp config stp version config stp config stp ports create stp instance_id config stp instance_id delete stp instance_id config stp priority config stp mst_config_id config stp mst_ports show stp show stp ports show stp instance Parameters mstp rstp stp maxage lt value 6 40 gt maxhops l
342. rofile lt mcastv6_address_list gt Specifies the MLD multicast addresses to be configured It can be a continuous single multicast addresses such as FF12 1 FF12 3 FF12 8 or a multicast address range such as FF12 1 FF12 12 or both of them such as FF12 1 FF12 18 FF12 20 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 185 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To add 225 1 1 1 to 226 1 1 1 to MLD multicast VLAN group profile g1 DAS 3626 admin config mld_snooping multicast _vlan_ group profile gl add FF12 1 FF12 2 Command config mld_snooping multicast _vlan_group_profile gl add FF12 1 FF12 2 Success DAS 3626 admin delete mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to delete an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Syntax delete mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile profile_name lt profile_name 1 32 gt jall Description This command deletes an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the MLD multicast VLAN profile name max length is 32 all All MLD multicast VLAN group profile will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the MLD multicast VLAN group profile g1 DAS 3626 admini delete mld snooping multicast _vlan_group profile profile name gl
343. rpose Used to display information about each SNMP username in the SNMP group username table Syntax show snmp user Description This command is used to display information about each SNMP username in the SNMP group username table Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the SNMP users currently configured on the Switch DAS 3626 admin show snmp user Command show snmp user Group Name VerAuthPriv initial V3 NoneNone Total Entries 1 DAS 3626 admin 89 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create snmp view Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to assign views to community strings to limit which MIB objects and SNMP manager can access create snmp view lt view_name 32 gt lt oid gt view_type included excluded This command is used to assign views to community strings to limit which MIB objects an SNMP manager can access lt view_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that identifies the SNMP view that will be created lt oid gt The object ID that identifies an object tree MIB tree that will be included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager view type Sets the view type to be e included Include this object in the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access e excluded Exclude this object from the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access Only Adm
344. rrently configured access profiles on the Switch DAS 3626 admini show access profile Command show access profile Access Profile Table Total Unused Rule Entries 1023 Total Used Rule Entries 1 Access Profile ID 5 Ethernet Profile Name 5 Owner Source MAC Destination MAC 802 1P Ethernet Type 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 02 Unused Entries 1023 DAS 3626 admin 406 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config time_range Purpose Used to configure the range of time to activate a function on the switch Syntax config time_range lt range_name 32 gt hours start_time lt time hh mm ss gt end_time lt time hh mm ss gt weekdays lt daylist gt delete Description This command defines a specific range of time to activate a function on the Switch by specifying which time range in a day and which days in a week are covered in the time range Note that the specified time range is based on SNTP time or configured time If this time is not available then the time range will not be met Parameters range_name Specifies the name of the time range settings start_time Specifies the starting time in a day 24 hr time For example 19 00 means 7PM 19 is also acceptable start_time must be smaller than end_time end_time Specifies the ending time in a day 24 hr time weekdays Specify the list of days contained in the time range Use a dash to define a period of days Use
345. rrently configured greeting message DAS 3626 admini show greeting message Command show greeting message DAS 3626 VDSL2 Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 1 00 B042 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved DAS 3626 admin 31 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Switch Utitity COMMANDS The switch utility commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table 32 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters download firmware_fromTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt lt path_filename 64 gt image_id lt int 1 2 gt cfg_fromTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt lt path_filename 64 gt config firmware image_id lt int 1 2 gt delete boot_up show config current_config config_in_nvram information upload cfg_toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt lt path_filename 64 gt log_toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt path_filename 64 gt attack_log_toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt ipv6addr gt lt path_filename 64 gt lping lt ipaddr gt times lt value 1 255 gt timeout lt sec 1 99 gt size lt value 32 1500 gt 33 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters lt ipv6addr gt times lt value 1 255 gt size lt value 1 6000 gt timeout lt value 1 10 gt 3
346. rs Choose one of the following to identify where severity messages are to be sent e trap Entering this parameter will define which events occurring on the Switch will be sent to a SNMP agent for analysis log Entering this parameter will define which events occurring on the Switch will be sent to the Switch s log for analysis all Entering this parameter will define which events occurring on the Switch will be sent to a SNMP agent and the Switch s log for analysis Choose one of the following to identify what level of severity warnings are to be sent to the destination entered above critical Entering this parameter along with the proper destination stated above will instruct the Switch to send only critical events to the Switch s log or SNMP agent warning Entering this parameter along with the proper destination stated above will instruct the Switch to send critical and warning events to the Switch s log or SNMP agent information Entering this parameter along with the proper destination stated above will instruct the switch to send informational warning and critical events to the Switch s log or SNMP agent Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 464 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure the system severity settings DAS 3626 admini config system_severity trap critical Command config sy
347. s DAS 3626 admin 340 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 341 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to display the system access authentication policy status on the Switch Syntax show authen_policy Description This command will show the current status of the access authentication policy on the Switch Parameters None 342 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 343 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the system access authentication policy 344 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini show authen_policy Command show authen_ policy Authentication Policy Enabled DAS 3626 admin 345 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 346 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create authen_login method_list_name Purpose Used to create a user defined method list of authentication methods for users logging on to the Switch Syntax create authen_login method_list_name lt string 15 gt Description This command is used to create a list for authentication techniques for user login The Switch can support up to eight method lists but one is reserved as a default and cannot be delet
348. s 86dd ARP is 806 and so on For IEEE802 3 LLC this is the 2 octet IEEE 802 2 Link Service Access Point LSAP pair first octet is for Destination Service Access Point DSAP and second octet is for Source Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage 144 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual To delete protocol ipv6 from a protocol group 1 DAS 3626 admini config dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 delete protocol ethernet _2 86DD Command config dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 delete protocol ethernet _2 86DD Success DAS 3626 admin delete dot1v_protocol_group Purpose Delete a protocol group Syntax delete dot1v_protocol_group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt all Description This command deletes a protocol group Parameters group _id The id of protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 characters Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete protocol group 1 DAS 3626 admini delete dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 Command delete dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 Success DAS 3626 admin show dot1v_protocol_group Purpose Display the protocols defined in a protocol group Syntax show dot1v_protocol_group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name
349. s will be shown rx tx Shows RX or TX packet counter If none is specified both of them are shown ccm Shows the CCM transmission state Restrictions None 271 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To clear the CFM packet RX TX counters DAS 3626 admini clear cfm pkt_cnt ports 2 rx Command clear cfm pkt_cnt ports 2 rx Success DAS 3600 12 4 config cfm mp_Itr_all Purpose To configure the CFM mp linktrace on the switch Syntax config cfm mp_lItr_all enable disable Description This command is used to configure the CFM mp linktrace on the switch Parameters enable Used to enable the CFM mp linktrace disable Used to disable the CFM mp linktrace Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure CFM mp linktrace DAS 3626 admini config cfm mp ltr _all enable Command config cfm mp_ltr_all enable Success DAS 3600 12 4 show cfm mp_Itr_all Purpose To display the CFM mp linktrace settings on the switch Syntax show cfm mp_Itr_all Description This command is used to display the CFM mp linktrace settings on the switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the CFM mp linktrace on the Switch DAS 3600 12 4 show cfm mp ltr all Command show cfm mp ltr all All MPs reply LTRs Enabled DAS 3600 12 4 272 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch
350. sable Enable No Limitation Querier State Fast Done Report Suppression Rate Limit Version 2 2 Data Enable Data Disable Data 260 Driven Learning State Driven Learning Aged Out Driven Group Expiry Time Total Entries 1 DAS 3626 admin show mid_snooping group Purpose Used to display the current MLD snooping group configuration on the switch Syntax show mld_snooping group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt lt ipv6addr gt data_driven This command is used to display the current MLD snooping group configuration on the switch Description Parameters vlan_name The name of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping configuration vlanid_list The VIDs of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping group configuration portlist The list of the ports for which you want to view the MLD snooping group configuration lt ipv6addr gt To view the information of this specified group data_driven To view the groups learnt by data driven only If no parameter is specified the system will display all current MLD snooping groups Restrictions None 196 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To show MLD snooping group on the switch DAS 3626 admin show mld snooping group Command show mld_ snooping group Source Group 2001 2 FF1E 1 VLAN Name VID default 1 Member P
351. sd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt frq lt frq gt psd_value lt psd_value gt Description This command is used to config vdsl profile Downstream Upstream PSD breakpoint Parameters lt profile_id 1 60 gt The profile ID of the profile to be configed name lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the profile to be configed PSDBreakPointTx PSDBreakPointRx To config VDSL profile Downstream Upstream PSD breakpoint numpsd Number of breakpoints frq Specifies the Downstream Upstream Tone Index for which we need to change the PSD value psd_value PSD value is in terms of 140 X dBStep dBm Hz with 0 5 dB Step Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vdsl profile vdsl profile Downstream Upstream PSD breakpoint DAS 3626 admin config vdsl profile name default PSDBreakPointTx 1 2 5 Command config vdsl profile name default PSDBreakPointTx 1 2 5 Success DAS 3626 admin 435 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl profile VirtualNoise Purpose Used to config vdsl profile virtual noise Syntax config vdsl profile lt profile_id 1 60 gt name lt profile_name 32 gt VirtualNoise level lt psd_level 60 140 gt lt psd_level 60 140 gt lt psd_level 60 140 gt lt psd_level 60 140 gt
352. se Used to display statistics about the packets sent and received by the Switch Syntax show packet ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display statistics about packets sent and received by ports specified in the lt portlist gt Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed 441 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show packet ports Restrictions None 442 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the packets analysis for port 2 443 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin tshow packet port 2 Command show packet port 2 Port Number 128 255 256 511 512 1023 1024 1518 Unicast RX Multicast RX Broadcast RX O O O O O OOOO Frame Type Total sec RX Frames TX Bytes TX Frames DAS 3626 admin 444 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 445 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show error ports Purpose Used to display the error statistics for a range of ports Syntax show error ports lt portlist gt Description This command will display all of the packet error statistics collected and logged by the Switch for a given port list Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed 446 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL
353. ser to an SNMP group that is also created by this command Syntax create snmp user lt user_name 32 gt lt groupname 32 gt encrypted by_password auth md5 lt auth_password 8 16 gt sha lt auth_password 8 20 gt priv none des lt priv_password 8 16 gt by_key auth md5 lt auth_key 32 32 gt sha lt auth_key 40 40 gt priv none des lt priv_key 32 32 gt Description This command is used to create a new SNMP user and adds the user to an SNMP group that is also created by this command SNMP ensures Message integrity Ensures that packets have not been tampered with during transit Authentication Determines if an SNMP message is from a valid source Encryption Scrambles the contents of messages to prevent it from being viewed by an unauthorized source Parameters lt user_name 32 gt An alphanumeric name of up to 32 characters that will identify the new SNMP user lt groupname 32 gt An alphanumeric name of up to 32 characters that will identify the SNMP group the new SNMP user will be associated with encrypted Allows the user to choose a type of authorization for authentication using SNMP The user may choose by_password Requires the SNMP user to enter a password for authentication and privacy The password is defined by specifying the auth_password below This method is recommended 87 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual by_key Requires the SNMP user t
354. show dhcp relay ipif System Command show dhcp relay ipif System DHCP Bootp Relay Status Disabled DHCP Bootp Hops Count Limit 2 Relay Time Threshold 23 Agent Information Option 82 State Disabled Agent Information Option 82 Check Disabled Agent Information Option 82 Policy Replace Interface Server 1 Server Server 3 Server 4 DAS 3626 admin 82 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable dhcp_relay Purpose Used to enable the DHCP BOOTP relay function on the Switch Syntax enable dhcp_relay Description This command is used to enable the DHCP BOOTP relay function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable DHCP relay DAS 3626 admin enable dhcp_relay Command enable dhcp_relay Success DAS 3626 admin disable dhcp_relay Purpose Used to disable the DHCP BOOTP relay function on the Switch Syntax disable dhcp_relay Description This command is used to disable the DHCP BOOTP relay function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable DHCP relay DAS 3626 admin disable dhcp_relay Command disable dhcp_relay Success DAS 3626 admin 83 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual EXTERNAL ALARM COMMANDS The external alarm commands in the
355. snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete member_port lt portlist gt tag_member_port lt portlist gt source_port lt portlist gt state enable disable replace_source_ip lt ipaddr gt Description This command allows you to add a member port add a tag member port and add a source port to the port list The member port will automatically become the untagged member of the IGMP multicast VLAN the tag member port and the source port will automatically become the tagged member of the IGMP multicast VLAN To change the port list the new port list will replace the previous port list if the add or delete is not specified The member port list and source port list can not overlap However the member port of one IGMP multicast VLAN can overlap with another IGMP multicast VLAN The IGMP multicast VLAN must be created first before configuration Parameters lt vian_name gt The name of the VLAN to be created Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters Member_port A range of member ports to add to the multicast VLAN They will become the untagged member port of the IGMP multicast VLAN tag_member_port Specifies the tagged member port of the IGMP multicast VLAN source_port A range of source ports to add to the multicast VLAN state enable or disable multicast VLAN for the chosen VLAN replace_source_ip With the IGMP snooping function the IGMP report packet sent by the h
356. sses and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the local use facilities or they may use the user level Facility Those Facilities that have been designated are shown in the following Bold font indicates the facility values the Switch currently supports Parameters Numerical Facility Code 459 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config syslog host kernel messages user level messages mail system system daemons security authorization messages messages generated internally by syslog line printer subsystem network news subsystem UUCP subsystem clock daemon security authorization messages FTP daemon NTP subsystem log audit log alert clock daemon local use 0 local0 local use 1 local1 local use 2 local2 local use 3 local3 local use 4 local4 local use 5 local5 local use 6 local6 local use 7 local7 ONOOaARWNH O local0 Specifies that local use 0 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 16 from the list above local1 Specifies that local use 1 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 17 from the list above local2 Specifies that local use 2 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 18 from the list above local3 Specifies that local use 3 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 19 from the list above
357. st SNMP Host Table Host IPv6 Address SNMP Version Community Name SNMPv3 User Name Total Entries 1 DAS 3626 admin 112 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create trusted_host Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to create the trusted host create trusted_host lt ipaddr gt This command is used to create the trusted host The Switch allows users to specify up to four IP addresses that are allowed to manage the Switch via in band SNMP or TELNET based management software These IP addresses must be members of the Management VLAN If no IP addresses are specified then there is nothing to prevent any IP address from accessing the Switch provided the user knows the Username and Password lt jpaddr gt The IP address of the trusted host to be created Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To create the trusted host DAS 3626 admin create trusted_host 10 62 32 1 Command create trusted_host 10 62 32 1 Success Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to create the trusted host create trusted_host network lt network_address gt This command is used to create the trusted host lt network_address gt IP address and netmask of the trusted host to be created Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To create the trusted
358. st of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific priority priority Specifies the result priority of mapping The default mapping are wwo x 2 a e s e 7 _ Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure DSCP map on the Switch DAS 3626 admini config dscp map dscp priority 0 to 7 Command config dscp map dscp priority 0 to 7 Success DAS 3626 admin show dscp map Purpose Used to display the DSCP map configure parameter Syntax show dscp map dscp_priotity Description This command is used to show DSCP trusted portlist and mapped color priority and DSCP Parameters dscp Specifies DSCP value that will be mapped Restrictions None Example usage To display the current DSCP map configuration on the Switch DAS 3626 admini show dscp map dscp_ priotity Command show dscp map dscp_priotity Priority 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 284 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 CTRL C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All 285 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual TRAFFIC CONTROL COMMANDS On a computer network packets such as Multicast packets and Broadcast packets continually flood the network as normal procedure At times this traffic may increase do to a malicious endstation on the network or a malfunctioning device such as a fau
359. stem_severity trap critical Success DAS 3626 admin show system_severity Purpose To display system_severity level of an alert required for log entry or trap message Syntax show system_severity Description This command is used to display system_severity level of an alert required for log entry or trap message Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the system severity settings for critical traps and log DAS 3626 admin show system_severity Command show system_severity System Severity Trap information System Severity Log information DAS 3626 admin 465 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Passworp Recovery Comman List The switch password recovery commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters reset config force_agree reboot force_agree reset account reset password lt username gt show account Each command is listed in detail in the following sections wish to enter the Switch into password recovery mode simply press after the system has iy NOTE All Password revovery commands can be executed in password revovery mode If you l booted up successfully and loaded the runtime image to 100 Boot Procedure vV1 00 B006 Power On Self Test MAC Address 00 80 C2 11 22 00 H W Version A1 Please wait loading V1 00 B035 Run
360. strator level users can issue this command 333 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To enable the system access authentication policy 334 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini enable authen_policy Command enable authen_policy Success DAS 3626 admin 335 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 336 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to disable system access authentication policy Syntax disable authen_policy Description This command will disable the administrator defined authentication policy for users trying to access the Switch When disabled the Switch will access the local user account database for username and password verification In addition the Switch will now accept the local enable password as the authentication for normal users attempting to access administrator level privileges Parameters None 337 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 338 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To disable the system access authentication policy 339 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admini disable authen_policy Command disable authen_policy Succes
361. t Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured all Specifies that the command applies to all ports on the Switch lt priority 0 7 gt The priority value to assign to untagged packets received by the Switch ora range of ports on the Switch Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 281 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure 802 1p default priority on the Switch DAS 3626 admini config 802 1p default priority all 5 Command config 802 1p default priority all 5 Success DAS 3626 admin show 802 1 default_priority Purpose Used to display the currently configured 802 1p priority value that will be assigned to an incoming untagged packet before being forwarded to its destination Syntax show 802 1p default_priority lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the currently configured 802 1p priority value that will be assigned to an incoming untagged packet before being forwarded to its destination Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured Restrictions None Example usage To display the current 802 1p default priority configuration on the Switch 282 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show 802 1p default_priority Command show 802 1p default priority Port Priority Effective Priority 0 0 0 0
362. t source_ip_mask lt netmask gt destination_ip_mask lt netmask gt dscp icmp type code igmp type tcp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 0xffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt flag_mask all urg ack psh rst syn fin 1 udp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt protocol_id_mask lt hex 0x0 0xff gt user_define_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 packet_content_mask destination_mac lt macmask gt source_mac lt macmask gt outer_tag lt hex 0x0 OxOfff gt offset1 I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex 0x0 0xff gt offset2 I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex 0x0 0xff gt offset3 I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset4 I2 I3 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offsetd I2 13 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt offset6 I2 I3 14 lt value 0 127 gt lt hex 0x0 0xff gt 1 ipv6 class flowlabel source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt destination_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt tcp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt udp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 1 Description This command is used to create an access profile on the Switch and to define which parts of each incoming frame s header the Switch will examine Masks can be entered that will be combined with the values the Switch finds in the spec
363. t all Description This command is used to disable the auto configuration of link local addresses when no IPv6 address is explicitly configured Parameters lt ipif_name 12 gt The name of the IP interface all Indicates all IP interfaces Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the automatic configuration of link local address for an interface DAS 3626 admin disable ipif_ipv6 link local auto System Command disable ipif_ ipv6_link_local_auto System Success DAS 3626 admin show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto Purpose Displays the link local address automatic configuration state Syntax show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto lt ipif_name 12 gt Description This command is used to display the link local address automatic configuration state Parameters lt ipif_ name 12 gt The name created for the IP interface Restrictions None Example usage To display the link local address automatic configuration state DAS 3626 admini show ipif ipv6 link _local_auto Command show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto IPIF System Automatic Link Local Address Disabled DAS 3626 admin 47 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual RouTING TABLE CommMANDS The routing table commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters default lt
364. t vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt lt ipv6addr gt data_driven show mlid_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Jall mrouter_ports static dynamic forbidden show mld_snooping rate_limit ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt config mld_snooping ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt value 1 1000 gt no_limit rate_limit show mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt forwarding show mlid_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipv6addr gt static_group create mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipv6addr gt static_group delete mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipv6addr gt static_group config mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt lt ipv6addr gt add delete lt portlist gt static_group show mld_snooping statistic vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid_list gt ports lt portlist gt counter clear mld_snooping statistic counter 191 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config mid_snooping Purpose Used to configure MLD snooping on the switch Syntax config mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt jall state enable dis
365. t all multicast_vlan_group_profile show igmp_ snooping lt profile_name 1 32 gt multicast_vlan_group_ profile config igmp_snooping disable enable multicast_vlan forward_unmatched Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 175 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to create an IGMP multicast VLAN Syntax create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt lt vlanid 2 4094 gt Description This command is used to create an IGMP multicast_vlan Multiple multicast VLAN can be configured The IGMP multicast VLAN being created can not exist in the 1Q VLAN database Multiple IGMP multicast VLAN can be created The IGMP multicast VLAN snooping function co exist with the 1Q VLAN snooping function Parameters lt vian_name gt The name of the VLAN to be created Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters vianid The VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN to be create The range is 2 4094 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create IGMP multicast VLAN RG 11 DAS 3626 admin create igmp_ snooping multicast_vlan RG 11 Command create igmp snooping multicast vlan RG 11 Success DAS 3626 admin config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to configure the parameter of the specific IGMP multicast VLAN Syntax config igmp_
366. t 1 12 mode active Success DAS 3626 admin 158 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show lacp_port Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display current LACP port mode settings show lacp_port lt portlist gt This command will display the LACP mode settings as they are currently configured lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured If no parameter is specified the system will display the current LACP status for all ports None To display LACP port mode settings DAS 3626 admini show lacp port 1 10 Command show lacp port 1 10 Activity Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 DAS 3626 admin 159 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual IGMP Snoopinc Commanps The IGMP Snooping commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config igmp_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vidlist gt all state enable disable fast_leave enable disable report_suppression enable disable config igmp_snooping querier vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all query_interval lt sec 1 65535 gt max_response_time lt sec 1 25 gt robustness_variable lt value 1 255 gt l
367. t over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show authen parameter Command show authen parameter Response Timeout 30 seconds User Attempts 3 DAS 3626 admin 388 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 389 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual enable admin Purpose Used to promote user level privileges to administrator level privileges Syntax enable admin Description This command is for users who have logged on to the Switch on the normal user level to become promoted to the administrator level After logging on to the Switch users will have only user level privileges To gain access to administrator level privileges the user will enter this command and will have to enter an authentication password Possible authentication methods for this function include TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS user defined server groups local enable local account on the Switch or no authentication none Because XTACACS and TACACS do not support the enable function the user must create a special account on the server host which has the username enable and a password configured by the administrator that will support the enable function This function becomes inoperable when the authentication policy is disabled Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To enable administrator privileges on the Switch DAS 3626 admin enable admin Passwo
368. t value 1 20 gt hellotime lt value 1 2 gt forwarddelay lt value 4 30 gt txholdcount lt value 1 10 gt fopdu enable disable nni_bpdu_addr dot1d dot1ad lt portlist gt externalCost auto lt value 1 200000000 gt hellotime lt value 1 2 gt migrate yes no edge true false auto restricted_tcn true false restricted_role true false p2p true false auto state enable disable fopdu enable disable lt value 1 15 gt lt value 1 15 gt add_vlan remove_vlan lt vidlist gt lt value 1 15 gt lt value 0 61440 gt instance_id lt value 0 15 gt revision_level lt int 0 65535 gt name lt string gt lt portlist gt instance_id lt value 0 15 gt internalCost auto value 1 200000000 priority lt value 0 240 gt lt portlist gt lt value 0 15 gt 212 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters show stp mst_config_id Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable stp Purpose Used to globally enable STP on the Switch Syntax enable stp Description This command allows the Spanning Tree Protocol to be globally enabled on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable STP globally on the Switch DAS 3626 admin tenable stp Command enable stp Success DAS 3626 admin disable stp
369. tatus Power Status AC Active DC Status DC POWER DOES NOT EXIST AC Status AC POWER EXIST FAN TRAY INSERT errCount Normal Normal Normal Threshold Hi Lo Status errCount Normal Normal Normal 14 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show serial_port Purpose Used to display the current serial port settings Syntax show serial_port Description This command is used to display the current serial port settings Parameters None DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show serial_port Restrictions None DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the serial port settings DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin show serial port Command show serial port Baud Rate 115200 Data Bits 8 Parity Bits None Stop Bits zT Auto Logout 10 mins DAS 3626 admin DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 20 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config serial_port Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to configure the serial bit rate that will be used to communicate with the management host and the auto logout time for idle connections config serial_port baud_rate 9600 19200 38400 115200 auto_log
370. tax cfm loopback lt macaddr gt mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt num lt int 1 65535 gt length lt int 0 1500 gt pattern lt string 1500 gt pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt Description The MAC address represents that the destination MEP or MIP which can be reached by this MAC address The MEP represents the source MEP to initiate the loop back message You can press Ctrl C to exit loop back test Parameters lt macadar gt Specifies the destination MAC address mepname Specifies the MEP name mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name num Specifies the number of LBMs to be sent The default value is 4 length Specifies the payload length of LBM to be sent The default is 0 pattern Specifies an arbitrary amount of data to be included in a Data TLV along with an indication of whether the Data TLV is to be included pdu_priority The 802 1p priority to be set in the transmitted LBMs If not specified it uses the same priority as CCMs and LTMs sent by the MA Restrictions None Example usage To configure CFM loop back DAS 3600 12 4 cfm loopback 00 01 02 03 04 05 mep mep1 Command cfm loopback 00 01 02 03 04 05 mep mep1 Request timed out Request timed out Reply from MPID 52 bytes xxx time xxxms Request timed out CFM loopback statistics for 00 0
371. tax enable sntp Description This command will enable SNTP support SNTP service must be separately configured see config sntp Enabling and configuring SNTP support will override any manually configured system time settings Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command SNTP settings must be configured for SNTP to function config sntp Example usage To enable the SNTP function DAS 3626 admin enable sntp Command enable sntp Success DAS 3626 admin disable sntp Purpose To disable SNTP server support Syntax disable sntp Description This command will disable SNTP support SNTP service must be separately configured see config sntp Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage 121 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual To disable SNTP support DAS 3626 admin disable sntp Command disable sntp Success DAS 3626 admin config time Purpose Used to manually configure system time and date settings Syntax config time lt date ddmmmyyyy gt lt time hh mm ss gt Description This command will configure the system time and date settings These will be overridden if SNTP is configured and enabled Parameters date Express the date using two numerical characters for the day of the month three alphabetical characters for the name of t
372. tch Syntax enable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128_ MD5 RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 Description This command will enable SSL on the Switch by implementing any one or combination of listed ciphersuites on the Switch Entering this command without a parameter will enable the SSL status on the Switch Enabling SSL will disable the web manager on the Switch Parameters ciphersuite A security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session The user may choose any combination of the following RSA_with_RC4_128 MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128 bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie Hellman key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash Algorithm RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 40 bit keys The ciphersuites are enabled by default on the Switch yet the SSL status is disabled by default Enabling SSL with a ciphersuite will not enable the SSL status on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users
373. te MEP Down will be sent error_ccm Only Fault Alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Error CCM Received will be sent xcon_ccm Only Fault Alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Cross connect CCM Received will be sent none No fault alarm is sent This is the default value alarm_time The time that a defect must last before the fault alarm can be sent The default value is 2 seconds alarm_reset_time The timer must be clear of any alarm defects before the fault can be re alarmed The default value is 10 seconds Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 260 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure the CFM mep GS 3700 12 5 config cfm mep mepid 1 md 1 ma 1 state enable ccm enable Command config cfm mep mepid 1 md 1 ma 1 state enable ccm enable Success DAS 3626 admin delete cfm mep Purpose Used to delete a created MEP Syntax delete cfm mep mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt Description This command is used to delete a created MEP Parameters mepname Specifies the MEP name It s unique among all MEPs configured on the device mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID It should be configured in MA s MEPID list md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name Restric
374. te igmp snooping multicast vlan_group_profile pl Success DAS 3626 admin config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to configure an IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile on the switch to add or delete multicast address on the profile Syntax config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcast_address_list gt Description This command configures an IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile on the switch to add or delete multicast address for the profile Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile name max length is 32 add delete Add or delete IGMP Multicast address list to or from this multicast VLAN group profile lt mcast_address_list gt Specifies the IGMP Multicast addresses to be configured It can be continuous single multicast addresses such as 225 1 1 1 225 1 1 3 225 1 1 8 or a multicast address range such as 225 1 1 1 225 2 2 2 or both of them such as 225 1 1 1 225 1 1 18 225 1 1 20 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add 233 1 1 1 to 266 1 1 1 to IGMP multicast VLAN group profile p1 DAS 3626 admini config igmp snooping multicast_vlan_group profile pl add 225 1 1 1 226 1 1 1 Command config igmp snooping multicast _vlan_group_profile pl add 225 1 1 1 226 1 1 1 Success DAS 3626 admin 180 DAS 3600 Series E
375. ters response_timeout lt int 0 255 gt Set the time in seconds the Switch will wait for a response of authentication from the user attempting to log in from the command line interface or telnet interface Zero means there won t be a time out The default value is 0 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the response timeout for 60 seconds DAS 3626 admin config authen parameter response timeout 60 Command config authen parameter response timeout 60 Success DAS 3626 admin Purpose Used to configure the maximum number of times the Switch will accept authentication attempts Syntax config authen parameter attempt lt int 1 255 gt Description This command will configure the maximum number of times the Switch will accept authentication attempts Users failing to be authenticated after the set amount of attempts will be denied access to the Switch and will be locked out of further authentication attempts Command line interface users will have to wait 60 seconds before another authentication attempt Telnet users will be disconnected from the Switch Parameters parameter attempt lt int 1 255 gt Set the maximum number of attempts the user may try to become authenticated by the Switch before being locked out The default setting is 3 Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Refe
376. the 2 octet IEEE 802 2 Link Service Access Point LSAP pair first octet is for Destination Service Access Point DSAP and second octet is for Source Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add a protocol IPv6 to protocol group 1 DAS 3626 admin config dotlv_protocol_ group group_id 1 add protocol ethernet 2 86DD Command config dotlv_protocol_ group group_id 1 add protocol ethernet 2 8 6DD Success DAS 3626 admin config dot1v_protocol_group delete protocol Purpose Used to delete a protocol from protocol group Syntax config dot1v_protocol_group group_id lt id gt group_name lt name gt delete protocol ethernet_2 ieee802 3_snap ieee802 3_Ilc lt protocol_value gt Description This command is used to delete a protocol from a protocol group Parameters group_id The id of protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 characters protocol_value The protoocl vlaue is used to identify a protocol of the frame type specified Depending on the frame type the octet string will have one of the following values The form of the input is 0x0 to Oxffff For ethernet ll this is a 16 bit 2 octet hex value Example Ipv4 is 800 ipv6 is 86dd ARP is 806 and so on For IEEE802 3 SNAP this is this is a 16 bit 2 octet hex value Example Ipv4 is 800 ipv6 i
377. the DHCP server When the DHCP server receives the packet if the server is capable of option 82 it can implement policies like restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID Then the DHCP server echoes the option 82 field in the DHCP reply The DHCP server unicasts the reply to the back to the relay agent if the request was relayed to the server by the relay agent The switch verifies that it originally inserted the option 82 data Finally the relay agent removes the option 82 field and forwards the packet to the switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request disable If the field is toggled to disable the relay agent will not insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients and the check and policy settings will have no effect Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure DHCP relay option 82 state DAS 3626 admini config dhcp relay option_82 state enable Command config dhcp relay option_82 state enable Success DAS 3626 admin 80 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp_relay option_82 check Purpose Used to configure the checking mechanism of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the switch Syntax config dhcp_relay option_82 check enable disable Description This command is us
378. thernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to delete an IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Syntax delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile profile_name lt profile_name 1 32 gt jall Description This command deletes an IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the IGMP Multicast VLAN profile name max length is 32 all All IGMP Multicast VLAN group profiles will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the IGMP multicast VLAN group profile p1 DAS 3626 admin delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile profile_name p1 Command delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile profile_name p1 Success DAS 3626 admin show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to view an IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Syntax show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt Description This command displays an IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the IGMP Multicast VLAN profile name max length is 32 If not specifies all IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile will be displayed Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To dis
379. this method of Storm Control choose the Shutdown option of the Action field in the window below The broadcast storm control commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config traffic control lt portlist gt all broadcast enable disable multicast enable disable unicast enable disable action drop shutdown threshold lt value 0 255000 gt time_interval lt value 5 30 gt countdown value 0 lt value 5 30 gt show traffic control lt portlist gt config traffic trap none storm_occurred storm_cleared both Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 286 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to configure broadcast multicast unicast packet storm control The software mechanism is provided to monitor the traffic rate in addition to the hardware storm control mechanism previously provided config traffic control lt portlist gt all broadcast enable disable multicast enable disable unicast enable disable action drop shutdown threshold lt value 0 255000 gt time_interval lt value 5 30 gt countdown value 0 lt value 5 30 gt This command is used to configure broadcast multicast unicast storm control By adding the new software traffic control mech
380. thods for users logging on to the Switch Syntax delete authen_login method_list_name lt string 15 gt Description This command is used to delete a list for authentication methods for user login Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given method list the user wishes to delete Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the method list name Trinity DAS 3626 admini delete authen_login method_list_name Trinity Command delete authen_login method _list_name Trinity Success DAS 3626 admin 353 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to display a previously configured user defined method list of authentication methods for users logging on to the Switch Syntax show authen_login default method_list_name lt string 15 gt all Description This command is used to show a list of authentication methods for user login Parameters default Entering this parameter will display the default method list for users logging on to the Switch method_list_name lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given method list to view all Entering this parameter will display all the authentication login methods currently configured on the Switch The window will display the following parameters e Method List Name The na
381. time image Password Recovery Mode gt 466 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual reset config Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to reset the configuration reset config force_agree This command is used to reset the configuration parameters The configuration is reset but not saved force_agree if this parameter is specified there will not be the prompt message to ask for user s confirmation None To reset the configuration gt reset config Command reset config Are you sure you want to proceed with system reset y n y Success reboot Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage To reboot reboot Used to exit Reset Configuration Mode and restart the switch reboot force_agree This command is used to exit the Reset Configuration Mode and restarts the switch And it pops out a confirmation message to save the current setting force_agree lf this parameter is specified there will not be the prompt message to ask for user s confirmation None Save current setting before system restart y n y Please wait the switch is rebooting 467 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual reset account Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete the created account reset account This c
382. tion group with a unique identifier Parameters lt value gt Specifies the group ID The Switch allows up to six link aggregation groups to be configured The group number identifies each of the groups type Specify the type of link aggregation used for the group If the type is not specified the default type is static e _lacp This designates the port group as LACP compliant LACP allows dynamic adjustment to the aggregated port group LACP compliant ports may be further configured see config lacp_ports LACP compliant must be connected to LACP compliant devices static This designates the aggregated port group as static Static port groups can not be changed as easily as LACP compliant port groups since both linked devices must be manually configured if the configuration of the trunked group is changed If static link aggregation is used be sure that both ends of the connection are properly configured and that all ports have the same speed duplex settings Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command VDSL ports cannot be used in a link aggregation group Example usage To create a link aggregation group DAS 3626 admini create link aggregation group_id 2 Command create link_aggregation group_id 2 Success DAS 3626 admin 155 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete link_aggregation Purpose Used to delete a previously configure
383. tion of IGMP Multicast VLAN show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt This command allows you to show the information of IGMP Multicast VLAN lt vlan_name gt The name of the multicast VLAN to be shown None To display IGMP Multicast VLAN DAS 3626 admin show igmp_ snooping multicast_vlan Command show igmp snooping multicast_vlan IGMP Multicast VLAN Global State Enabled VLAN Name VID RG 11 Member Untagged Ports 4 5 Tagged Member Ports Source Ports Status Enabled Replace Source IP 0 0 0 0 Total Entry 1 DAS 3626 admin 179 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to create an IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Syntax create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt Description This command is used to create an IGMP Multicast VLAN group profile The profile name cannot be used for IGMP snooping or MLD snooping Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the IPv4 multicast VLAN group profile name max length is 32 If not specified all IPv4 multicast VLAN group profiles will be displayed Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an IGMP multicast VLAN group profile p1 DAS 3626 admini create igmp snooping multicast _vlan_group profile pl Command crea
384. tions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete CFM mep DAS 3626 admin delete cfm mep mepname mep1 Command delete cfm mep mepname mep1 Success DAS 3626 admin delete cfm ma Purpose Used to delete a created maintenance association Syntax delete cfm ma lt string 22 gt md lt string 22 gt Description All MEPs created in the maintenance association will be deleted automatically Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a CFM ma DAS 3626 admin delete cfm ma opl md 3 Command delete cfm ma opl md 3 Success DAS 3626 admin 261 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete cfm md Purpose Used to delete a created maintenance domain Syntax delete cfm md lt string 22 gt Description All MEPs and maintenance associations created in the maintenance domain will be deleted automatically Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a CFM md DAS 3626 admin delete cfm md 3 Command delete cfm md 3 Success DAS 3600 12 4 enable cfm Purpose This command is used to enable CFM globally Syntax enable cfm Description This
385. tions on access profiles and access rules 397 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual The deny parameter instructs the Switch to filter any frames that meet the criteria in this case when a logical AND operation between an IP address specified in the next step and the ip_source_mask match The default for an access profile on the Switch is to permit traffic flow If users want to restrict traffic users must use the deny parameter Now that an access profile has been created users must add the criteria the Switch will use to decide if a given frame should be forwarded or filtered We will use the config access_profile command to create a new rule that defines the criteria we want Let s further specify in the new rule to deny access to a range of IP addresses through an individual port Here we want to filter any packets that have an IP source address between 10 42 73 0 and 10 42 73 255 and specify the port that will not be allowed config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip source_ip 10 42 73 1 port 7 deny We use the profile_id 1 which was specified when the access profile was created The add parameter instructs the Switch to add the criteria that follows to the list of rules that are associated with access profile 1 For each rule entered into the access profile users can assign an access_id that identifies the rule within the list of rules The access_id is an index number and does not effect pr
386. tisement Specifies that the VLAN is able to join GVRP 126 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create vian Restrictions Each VLAN name can be up to 32 characters Up to 4094 static VLANs may be created per configuration Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 127 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To create a VLAN v1 tag 2 128 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual DAS 3626 admin create vlan v1 tag 2 Command create vlan vl tag 2 Success DAS 3626 admin 129 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 130 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create vlan vianid Purpose Used to create multiple VLANs by VLAN ID list on the switch Syntax create vlan vianid lt vidlist gt advertisement Description This command is used to create multiple VLANs on the switch Parameters lt vidlist gt Specifies a range of multiple VLAN IDs to be created advertisement Join GVRP or not If not the VLAN can t join dynamically 131 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual create vlan vianid Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 132 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To create a VLAN ID on the Switch
387. tive Port Status Disabled Flooding Port Total Entries DAS 3626 admin config lacp_port Purpose Used to configure settings for LACP compliant ports Syntax config lacp_port lt portlist gt mode active passive Description This command is used to configure ports that have been previously designated as LACP ports see create link_aggregation Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured mode Select the mode to determine if LACP ports will process LACP control frames e active Active LACP ports are capable of processing and sending LACP control frames This allows LACP compliant devices to negotiate the aggregated link so the group may be changed dynamically as needs require In order to utilize the ability to change an aggregated port group that is to add or subtract ports from the group at least one of the participating devices must designate LACP ports as active Both devices must support LACP passive LACP ports that are designated as passive cannot process LACP control frames In order to allow the linked port group to negotiate adjustments and make changes dynamically at one end of the connection must have active LACP ports see above Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure LACP port mode settings DAS 3626 admin config lacp port 1 12 mode active Command config lacp por
388. to create a STP instance ID for MSTP Syntax create stp instance_id lt value 1 15 gt Description This command allows the user to create a STP instance ID for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol There are 16 STP instances on the Switch one internal CIST unchangeable and the user may create up to 15 instance IDs for the Switch Parameters lt value 1 15 gt Enter a value between 1 and 15 to identify the Spanning Tree instance on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a spanning tree instance 2 DAS 3626 admini create stp instance_id 2 Command create stp instance id 2 Warning There is no VLAN mapping to this instance id Success DAS 3626 admin 217 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual 218 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp instance_id Used to add or delete VID to from an STP instance Purpose Syntax Description Parameters config stp instance_id lt value 1 15 gt add_vlan remove_vlan lt vidlist gt This command is used to map VIDs VLAN IDs to previously configured STP instances on the Switch by creating an instance_id A STP instance may have multiple members with the same MSTP configuration There is no limit to the number of STP regions in a network but each region only supports a maximum of 16 spanning tree instances one unchangeable
389. trap support Syntax enable snmp traps Description This command is used to enable SNMP trap support on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable SNMP trap support on the Switch DAS 3626 admin enable snmp traps Command enable snmp traps Success DAS 3626 admin enable snmp authenticate_traps Purpose Used to enable SNMP authentication trap support Syntax enable snmp authenticate_traps Description This command is used to enable SNMP authentication trap support on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 115 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To turn on SNMP authentication trap support DAS 3626 admini enable snmp authenticate_traps Command enable snmp authenticate _ traps Success DAS 3626 admin show snmp traps Purpose Used to show SNMP trap support on the Switch Syntax show snmp traps Description This command is used to view the SNMP trap support status currently configured on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view the current SNMP trap support DAS 3626 admin show snmp traps Command show snmp traps SNMP Traps Enabled Authenticate Trap Enabled DAS 3626 admin disable snmp traps Purpose Used to disable SNMP trap support on the
390. trenesntavnnaaasiiieriaceaientsienninen 290 PORT SECURITY COMMANDS vscses ciitisttveiasn ieee tha omindns aetna ene ee anininiaia ean 293 SSLICOMMAN DS visa iini e oaa eiai iea titen a dee saswus Ee anaia sal uaauitteaelencandtaueusctveinneusy 297 SSH COMMAND Sa aat a tees Eae raae aaa teatada elder Lanai 303 ACCESS AUTHENTICATION CONTROL COMMANDG cccccccssseeeeeseeneeensseneeeeesssneeeeeees 327 FILTER COMMANDS DHCP SERVER NETBIOS ccceecessesseeeeeesesneeeeeeeeneeeeeaseneeeeessenees 392 ACCESS CONTROL LIST ACL COMMANDG cccccsseeeeeesesneeeeeeesneeeeessessnccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 396 VDSL COMMANDS iixcieescaccsnasispcet cucu tesasatenvanisnancsceccnvaceteinvansedcsecndacekseskadeicbads tdeldegusdscehivadeavace 410 NETWORK MONITORING COMMAND 0 cccccceeeeeesneeeeessecneeeeeeseeeseesseneeeeessseeeeeeeeesseseeees 440 PASSWORD RECOVERY COMMAND LIST ccccseeeessssteeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeneeeeeessceeeeeseeeeessneeeees 466 COMMAND HISTORY LIST care iiho ei saul aae ea ae taae a aaaea aidaa aoia di 470 PASSWORD RECOVERY PROCEDURE DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual INTRODUCTION The VDSL Switch can be managed through the VDSL Switch s serial port Telnet or the Web based management agent The Command Line Interface CLI can be used to configure and manage the VDSL Switch via the serial port or Telnet interfaces This manual provides a reference for all of the commands conta
391. tware on the Switch Syntax enable web lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt Description This command is used to enable the Web based management software on the Switch The user can specify the TCP port number the Switch will use to listen for Telnet requests Parameters lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt The TCP port number TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535 The well known port for the Web based management software is 80 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable HTTP and configure port number DAS 3626 admin enable web 80 24 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Command enable web 80 Success DAS 3626 admin disable web Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to disable the HTTP based management software on the Switch disable web This command disables the Web based management software on the Switch None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To disable HTTP DAS 3626 admin disable web Command disable web Success DAS 3626 admin Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to save changes in the Switch s configuration to non volatile RAM save config lt config_id 1 2 gt log all This command is used to enter the current switch configuration into non volatile RAM The s
392. tween the Switch and a remote SNMP manager auth_nopriv Specifies that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager auth_priv Specifies that authorization will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger will be encrypted read_view Specifies that the SNMP group being created can request SNMP messages write_view Specifies that the SNMP group being created has write privileges notify_view Specifies that the SNMP group being created can receive SNMP trap messages generated by the Switch s SNMP agent lt view_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an SNMP group named sg1 DAS 3626 admini create snmp group sgl v3 noauth_nopriv read view vl write _view vl notify view vl Command create snmp group sgl v3 noauth_nopriv read view vl write_view vl notify view DAS 3626 admin 98 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual delete snmp group Purpose Used to remove an SNMP group from the Switch Syntax delete snmp group lt groupname 32 gt Description This command is used to remove an SNMP group from the Switch Parameters lt groupn
393. ual Encloses an optional value or set of optional arguments reset config system force_agree Description In the above syntax example users have the option to specify config or system It is not necessary to specify either optional value however the effect of the system reset is dependent on which if any value is specified Therefore with this example there are three possible outcomes of performing a system reset See the following chapter Basic Commands for more details about the reset command Delete Deletes the character under the cursor and then shifts the remaining characters in the line to the left Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor and then shifts the remaining characters in the line to the left Left Arrow Moves the cursor to the left Right Arrow Moves the cursor to the right Up Arrow Repeats the previously entered command Each time the up arrow is pressed the command previous to that displayed appears This way it is possible to review the command history for the current session Use the down arrow to progress sequentially forward through the command history list Down Arrow The down arrow will display the next command in the command history entered in the current session This displays each command sequentially as it was entered Use the up arrow to review previous commands Shifts the cursor to the next field to the left e Poseemos OO O OOOO a So he ly of remaining peges when m
394. ublic Command create snmp host 10 48 74 100 v3 auth_priv public Success DAS 3626 admin delete snmp host Purpose Used to remove a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Syntax delete snmp host lt ipaddr gt Description This command is used to delete a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Parameters lt jpaddr gt The IP address of a remote SNMP manager that will receive SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete an SNMP host entry DAS 3626 admin delete snmp host 10 48 74 100 Command delete snmp host 10 48 74 100 Success DAS 3626 admin 103 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to display the recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Syntax show snmp host lt ipaddr gt Description This command is used to display the IP addresses and configuration information of remote SNMP managers that are designated as recipients of SNMP traps that are generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Parameters lt jpaddr gt The IP address of a remote SNMP manager that will receive SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent 104 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual show snmp host Restrictions None 105 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI
395. unchanged 36 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual download Restrictions The TFTP server must be on the same IP subnet as the Switch Only Administrator level users can issue this command 37 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To download a configuration file DAS 3626 admini download cfg fromTFTP 10 48 74 121 c cfg setting txt Command download cfg fromTFTP 10 48 74 121 c cfg setting txt DAS 3626 DAS 3626 DAS 3626 VDSL2 Configuration Firmware Build 1 00 B042 admin BASIC admin admin config serial port baud_rate 115200 auto logout 10 minutes config serial port baud_rate 115200 auto logout 10 minutes The download configuration command will initiate the loading of the various settings in the order listed in the configuration file When the file has been successfully loaded the message End of configuration file for DAS 3600 12 appears followed by the command prompt DAS 3626 admini disable authen_policy Command disable authen_policy Success DAS 3626 admin DAS 3626 DAS 3626 DAS 3626 DAS 3626 config firmware Purpose Used to configure the firmware section as a boot up section or to delete the firmware section Syntax config firmware image_id lt int 1 2 gt delete boot_up Description This command is used to configure the firmware section The user may choose to remove the firmware section or use it
396. upports three versions of the Spanning Tree Protocol 802 1D 2004 STP compatible 802 1D 2004 Rapid STP and 802 1Q 2005 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol or MSTP is a standard defined by the IEEE community that allows multiple VLANs to be mapped to a single spanning tree instance which will provide multiple pathways across the network Therefore these MSTP configurations will balance the traffic load preventing wide scale disruptions when a single spanning tree instance fails This will allow for faster convergences of new topologies for the failed instance Frames designated for these VLANs will be processed quickly and completely throughout interconnected bridges utilizing either of the three spanning tree protocols STP RSTP or MSTP This protocol will also tag BDPU packets so receiving devices can distinguish spanning tree instances spanning tree regions and the VLANs associated with them These instances will be classified by an instance_id MSTP will connect multiple spanning trees with a Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST will automatically determine each MSTP region its maximum possible extent and will appear as one virtual bridge that runs a single spanning tree Consequentially frames assigned to different VLANs will follow different data routes within administratively established regions on the network continuing to allow simple and full processing of frames regardless of administrative errors in defining VLANs and their
397. us ratelimit safeguard engine scheduling serial port session ssh ssl syslog system_severity time time_range traffic segmentation vdsl vlan vlan_translation_profile DAS 3626 admin access_profile arpentry authen_enable authorization command history account asymmetric vlan authen_login bandwidth_control config dotlv_protocol_ group error external alarm firmware greeting message igmp_snooping ipif iproute ipv6 limited_multicast_addr log_save_timing loopdetect lpr mcast_filter profile module info multicast port port_security pvid ging rmt router _ports scheduling mechanism snmp sntp stp switch system_usage_ threshold traffic trusted host vian_counter vian_trunk utilization vilan_translation Figure 2 6 Next possible completions Show Command In the above example all of the possible next parameters for the show command are displayed At the next command prompt the up arrow was used to re enter the show command followed by the account parameter The CLI then displays the user accounts configured on the Switch DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Commanp SYNTAX The following symbols are used to describe how command entries are made and values and arguments are specified in this manual The online help contained in the CLI and available through the console interface uses the same syntax a Note All commands are case sensitive Be sure to disable Caps L
398. user lt user_name 32 gt lt groupname 32 gt encrypted by_password auth md5 lt auth_password 8 16 gt sha lt auth_password 8 20 gt priv none des lt priv_password 8 16 gt by_key auth md5 lt auth_key 32 32 gt sha lt auth_key 40 40 gt priv none des lt priv_key 32 32 gt aow OOOO create snmp lt community_string 32 gt view lt view_name 32 gt read_only read_write community delete snmp lt community_string 32 gt community show snmp lt community_string 32 gt community config snmp enginelD lt snmp_enginelD 10 64 gt create snmp group lt groupname 32 gt v1 v2c v3 noauth_nopriv auth_nopriv auth_priv read_view lt view_name 32 gt write_view lt view_name 32 gt notify_view lt view_name 32 gt delete snmp group lt groupname 32 gt create snmp host host lt ipaddr gt v6host lt ipv6addr gt v1 v2c v3 noauth_nopriv auth_nopriv auth_priv 86 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual OOo o o i e enable snmp traps snmp enable snmp traps enable snmp authenticate_traps show snmp traps snmp show snmp traps disable snmp authenticate_traps config snmp lt sw_contact gt system_contact config snmp lt sw_location gt system_location config snmp lt sw_name gt system_name maes S Each command is listed in detail in the following sections Purpose Used to create a new SNMP user and adds the u
399. ver VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage Show vdsl line performance counter DAS 3626 admin show vdsl line 24 pm_conters 15 mins show vdsl line 24 pm_conters 15 mins Line vdsI24 Downstream Upstream Num ES SES UAS CRC LOSS LOFS ES SES UAS CRC LOSS LOFS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DAS 3626 admin oooooo0oo0o92 00000000 coOoOO OOo eo PC 00000000 421 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl pm_threshold Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to config vdsl performance counter threshold config vdsl pm_threshold 15min 1day both near_end far_end both_ends es lt threshold gt ses lt threshold gt uas lt threshold gt crc_error lt threshold gt This command is used to config VDSL near_end and far_end performance counter threshold including ES Errored Second SES Severely Errored Second UAS Unavailable Second CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check 15min 1day both config 15 minute one day performance counter threshold near_ena far_end both_ends config VDSL near_end or far_end performance counter threshold es lt threshold gt ses lt threshold gt uas lt threshold gt crc_error lt threshold gt config ES SES UAS or CRC counter threshold Only Administrator level users can issue this command To config vdsl performance counter threshold DAS 3626 admin con
400. w pvid auto_assign Description This command is used to display PVID auto assignment state Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display PVID auto assignment state DAS 3626 admini show pvid auto_assign Command show pvid auto_assign PVID Auto assignment Enabled DAS 3626 admin config gvrp timer Purpose Used to configure the timer s value of GVRP and MAC address of GVRP s PDU of NNI port in Q in Q mode Syntax config gvrp timer join leave leaveall lt value 100 100000 gt nni_bpdu_addr dot1d dottad Description This command is used to set the GVRP timer s value and GVRP s PDU MAC address of NNI port in Q in Q mode The default value for Join time is 200 milliseconds for Leave time is 600 milliseconds for LeaveAll time is 10000 milliseconds The GVRP s PDU MAC address can be set to which is defined in 802 1d or 802 1ad Parameters timer Specifies GVRP timer will be set join Specifies the Join time will be set leave Specifies the Leave time will be set leaveall Specifies the LeaveAll time will be set value The time value will be set The value range is 100 to 100000 milliseconds In addition the Leave time should greater than 2 Join times and the LeaveAll time should greater than Leave time nni_bpdu_addr Specifies GVRP s PDU MAC address of NNI port in Q in Q mode will be set dot1d Specifies GVRP s PDU MAC address of NNI port using 802 1d s de
401. wer down up 0 0 0 0 dbm 9 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm 10 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm VDSL _ 11 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dom VDSL 12 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dom VDSL _ 13 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm VDSL _ 14 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dom VDSL _ 15 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm VDSL 16 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm VDSL _ 17 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dom VDSL _ 18 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dom VDSL _ 19 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dom VDSL _ 20 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm VDSL _ 21 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm VDSL 22 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dom VDSL _ 23 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dbm VDSL 24 txpower down up 0 0 0 0 dom DAS 3626 admin 414 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual config vdsl line Purpose Used to configure vdsl line configuration Syntax config vdsl line lt portlist gt all state use 1 no_use 0 name lt name gt retrain reset loopback co_side 0 eoc 1 cpe_side 2 times lt int 1 400 gt size lt int 64 1518 gt loop_diagnostic Description This command will configure the VDSL line state name re train reset loopback test loop_diagnostic Parameters lt portlist gt all The list of port numbers to config state Used to use no_use the VDSL line name config vdsl line as assigned name retrain re train vdsl line reset reset vdsl line loopback Used
402. witch s System clock DAS 3626 admin show time Command show time Current Time Source System Clock Boot Time 3 Jan 2000 22 45 36 Current Time 4 Jan 2000 01 56 30 Time Zone GMT 00 00 Daylight Saving Time Disabled Offset In Minutes 60 Repeating From Apr lst Sun 00 00 To Oct last Sun 00 00 Annual From 29 Apr 00 00 To 12 Oct 00 00 DAS 3626 admin 124 DAS 3600 Series Ethernet over VDSL Switch CLI Reference Manual VLAN Commanps The VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt tag lt vlanid 2 4094 gt type 1q_vlan advertisement create vlan vlanid lt vidlist gt advertisement a vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt delete vian vianid vlan vlanid lt vidlist gt config vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt add tagged untagged forbidden delete lt portlist gt advertisement enable disable config vlan vlanid lt vidlist gt add tagged untagged forbidden delete lt portlist gt advertisement enable disable name lt vlan_name gt config port_vlan lt portlist gt all gvrp_state enable disable ingress_ checking enable disable acceptable_frame tagged_only admit_all pvid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Cr wwe S group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt config dot1v_protocol_ group group_id lt id 1 16

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Everbilt ZE00804 Use and Care Manual  LG 60PB6650 Energy Guide : Free Download, Borrow, and Streaming : Internet Archive  MODE D`EPLOI  Educator`s Guide to KITE Client  製品に起因して生じた事故かどうか不明であると判断する案件（PDF形式  Powerline Edition (XAVN2001) User Manual  Yamaha RX-V630 Receiver  ユーノ  LWB's Drupal User Manual - Wek'eezhii Land and Water Board    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file